The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel.
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 10 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please
ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement
cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.
If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe
electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Blue : Neutral Brown : Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
WARNING
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filled
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
or moisture.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En
D3-4-2-1-3_A_En
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
or 120 V) written on the rear panel.
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
VENTILATION CAUTION
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
equipment.
This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 60 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
30 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
Page 3
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
warranty period.
K041_En
Important information about this unit‘s AC outlets
Switched total 100 W, 0.4 A MAX
Power supplied through these outlets is turned on and off by this unit’s STANDBY/ON switch. Total electrical
power consumption of connected equipment should not exceed 100 W, 0.4 A.
CAUTION
• Do not connect a TV set, monitor, heater or similar appliance to this unit’s AC outlet.
• Do not connect appliances with high power consumption to the AC outlet in order to avoid overheating and fire
risk. This can cause this unit to malfunction.
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used
electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.
Private households in the member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to
designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).
For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.
By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential
negative effects on the environment and human health.
D3-4-2-2-1b_B_En
K058_A_En
Page 4
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied
accessories:
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)
• Remote control unit
• AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries x2
• AM loop antenna
•FM wire antenna
•Power cord
• Warranty card
• These operating instructions
• Operating instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY
(VSX-LX70 only)
Installing the receiver
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a
level and stable surface.
Don’t install it on the following places:
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.
– in direct sunlight
– in damp or wet areas
– in extremely hot or cold areas
– in places where there is vibration or other movement
– in places that are very dusty
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)
Loading the batteries
Caution
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
• Never use new and old batteries together.
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries
properly according to the marks in the battery case.
• Batteries with the same shape may have different
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
• Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
6
En
Page 7
5 minute guide
Chapter 2:
5 minute guide
Introduction to home theater
Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to
create a surround sound effect, making you feel like
you’re in the middle of the action or concert. The
surround sound you get from a home theater system
depends not only on your speaker setup, but also on the
source and the sound settings of the receiver.
This receiver will automatically decode multichannel
Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround sources according
to your speaker setup. In most cases, you won’t have to
make changes for realistic surround sound, but other
possibilities (like listening to a CD with multichannel
surround sound) are explained in Listening to your system on page 28.
Listening to Surround Sound
This receiver was designed with the easiest possible
setup in mind, so with the following quick setup guide,
you should have your system hooked up for surround
sound in no time at all. In most cases, you can simply
leave the receiver in the default settings.
• Be sure to complete all connections before
connecting this unit to an AC power source.
1Connect your TV and DVD player.
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 14 to do
this. For surround sound, you’ll want to hook up using a
digital connection from the DVD player to the receiver.
2Connect your speakers and place them for optimal
surround sound.
Connect your speakers as shown in Installing your
speaker system on page 19.
Where you place the speakers will have a big effect on the
sound. Place your speakers as shown below for the best
surround sound effect. Also see Placing the speakers on
page 20 for more on this.
Fron t
Left (L)
Center (C)
Listening
position
Surround
Left (SL)
Fron t
Right (R)
Subwoofer (SW)
Surround
Back Left (SBL)
Surround
Right (SR)
Surround
Back
Right (SBR)
3Plug in the receiver and switch it on, followed by
your DVD player, your subwoofer and the TV.
Plug the power cable into the AC outlet and switch on the
receiver.
1
Make sure you’ve set the video input on your TV
to this receiver. Check the manual that came with the TV
if you don’t know how to do this.
• Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level.
4Use the on-screen automatic MCACC setup to set up
your system.
See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC
& Full Band Phase Control) below for more on this.
5Play a DVD, and adjust the volume to your liking.
Make sure that DVD/LD is showing in the receiver’s
display, indicating that the DVD input is selected. If it
isn’t, press DVD on the remote control to set the receiver
to the DVD input.
In addition to the basic playback explained in Playing a source on page 9, there are several other sound options
you can select. See Listening to your system on page 28
for more on this.
See also Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 39 for more setup options.
02
Note
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 15-second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process.
The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the
HDMI Control mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the HDMI Control feature, see HDMI Control on page 64.
7
En
Page 8
02
5 minute guide
Automatically setting up for surround
sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase
Control)
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account
ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for
both channel delay and channel level. After you have set
up the microphone provided with your system, the
receiver uses the information from a series of test tones
to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your
particular room, and also to calibrate the frequencyphase characteristics of the speakers connected.
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a source on page 9.
Important
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the
headphones should be disconnected and the iPod,
HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) function should not be selected as an input
source.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVDTV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PTY SEARCH
TV VOL
PROGRAM
GUIDE
CLEAR
+
10
TUNE
STST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
CH
LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
DISC
2Connect the microphone to the
MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your
normal listening position (use a tripod if possible). Make
sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and
the microphone.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel
door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack:
AUDIOVIDEO
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
(ST)(ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
TUNER EDITSPEAKERSBAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SIGNAL
SOURCE/REC SEL
SELECT
CONTROL ON/OFF
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
PROCESSING
STEREO/
SB ch
F.S.SURR
The Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone
is connected.
3Make sure ‘
MCACC preset
1
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Surr Back System
[Normal (default)]
Save SYMMETRY to
[M1. MEMORY 1 ]
START
ENTER:Start :Cancel
Normal (Default)
3
then select
-
55.0
dB
’ is selected,2 select an
4
START
.
4Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to
a comfortable volume level.
5Wait for the test tones to finish then confirm the
speaker configuration in the OSD.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.
5
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 6.
8
En
1Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Note
1 • You can’t use the System Setup menu in either the main or sub zone when the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only)
input source is selected. When you set ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to ON (page 60), you can’t use the System Setup menu.
• If you cancel the Auto MCACC Setup, or leave an error message for over three minutes, the screen saver will appear.
2 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker setting on page 42 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select CUSTOM and choose YES for the THX Speaker setting.
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can
rename it later in Data Management on page 48).
4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and
FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39 for more on this.
5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
Page 9
5 minute guide
GUIDE
PTY
SEARCH
02
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check Microphone) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
1
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the
power and check the speaker connections. If there
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /
to select the speaker and / to change the setting
(and number for surround back) and continue.
6Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
ENTER
.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker
Distance, Standing Wave, Acoustic Cal EQ and Full Band
Phase Control.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
7The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press
to go back to the System Setup menu.
RETURN
2
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
System Setup menu (starting on page 39).
3
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
TV VOL
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
CD
DVDTV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
SELECT
CD-R
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
TV/DTV
A
MPX
BCDE
AUDIO SUBTITLE
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
SIGNAL SEL
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for
example a DVD player), your TV
4
and subwoofer (if you
have one), then the receiver (press RECEIVER).
• Make sure the setup mic is disconnected.
2Select the input source you want to play.
You can use the input source buttons on the remote
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT
SELECTOR dial.
5
SELECT
EON
DISP
THX
PHASE
REC
T.DISP
INFO
REC STOP
JUKEBOX
HDD
CH
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV.SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
VOL
MUTE
DVD
CH
Note
1 If you’re using the front panel display, the diagram in Listening to Surround Sound above indicates (in bold) how each speaker is displayed.
2 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39 for more on this.
3 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings.
You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 50.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
4 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO 1 jacks on your TV, m ake sure that the
VIDEO 1 input is now selected).
5 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 31).
9
En
Page 10
02
5 minute guide
3Press
SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.
S.DIRECT (STREAM DIRECT
) to select ‘AUTO
1
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.
• See also Listening to your system on page 28 for
information on different ways of listening to sources.
4Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
Better sound using Phase Control and
Full Band Phase Control
This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions
that correct phase distortion and group delay: Phase
Control and Full Band Phase Control. Activating Full
Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it
also involves the effects of Phase Control. For details on
each of these two features, refer to the following
explanations.
Using Phase Control
During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency
Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each
channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the
subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker. At least in
theory, however, this type of processing involves a group
delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase
distortion where the low-frequency sound is delayed or
muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the
Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can
reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the
quality of the original sound (see illustration below).
Phase Control OFF
Listening
position
Sound muffled due
to a delay in time
Sound
source
Front speaker
Subwoofer
• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear
• Bass sound with loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with no reality
Phase Control ON
Listening
position
Original sound
preserved with
no loss of clarity
Sound
source
Front speaker
Subwoofer
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity
• Bass sound with no loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound
reproduction through the use of phase matching
2
for an
optimal sound image at your listening position. The
default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase
Control switched on for all sound sources.
T.DISP
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHOTO
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
•Press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to select PHASE
CONTROL.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.
10
En
Note
1 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and
88.2 kHz/96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be set to a
multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 28 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.
2 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together,
resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper section of the diagram
above) then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set
to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the
orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When MULTI CH IN is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options.
Page 11
5 minute guide
02
Using Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers
connected.
Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use
generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency
bands output from a speaker system consisting of
multiple speakers (in case of typical 3-way speakers, for
instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the
woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and lowfrequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers
are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude
characteristics across wide ranges, there are cases
where the group delay characteristics are not effectively
flattened. This phase distortion of the speakers
subsequently causes group delay (the delay of lowfrequency sound against high-frequency sound) during
audio signal playback.
This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase
characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals
output from the speakers with the supplied microphone,
therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase
characteristics during audio signal playback
correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers.
This correction minimizes group delay between the
ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase
characteristics across all ranges.
Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase
characteristics between channels ensure better
surround sound integration for multichannel setting.
Full Band Phase Control OFF
Tweeter
Midrange
1
– the same
2
Sound in the middle- and low-frequency ranges is
delayed against the high-frequency sound due to group
delay.
Full Band Phase Control ON
Tweeter
Midrange
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
Hz
With the phase distortion corrected, the frequency-phase
characteristics are improved across all ranges.
• Sound with live dynamics
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
• Sound so accurately reproduced that you can even
hear the lip movement of the singer
• Speech heard with no loss of clarity
• Surround sound with excellent integration
T.DISP
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
•
Press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to select
FULLBAND PHASE.
3
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control
functions are switched on. The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
indicator lights on the front panel display.
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
Hz
Note
1 To calibrate and analyze the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, follow the procedures in Auto MCACC (see Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8) or FULL BAND PHASE CTRL in the System Setup (see Full Band Phase Control on page 47).
Select ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC setup with CUSTOM. Upon calibration of the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, the FULL
BAND PHASE CTRL feature is automatically switched on. Note that FULLBAND PHASE cannot be selected unless the frequency-phase characteristics of
the speakers are calibrated.
2 The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed graphically in the
OSD (see Full Band Phase Control on page 47). Also, when yo ur PC is con nected to this recei ver, the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers
calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC (see Advanced MCACC output using your PC on
page 63).
3• The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When headphones are plugged in.
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When MULTI CH IN is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options.
11
En
Page 12
03
Connecting your equipment
Chapter 3:
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
Rear panel
This illustration shows the VSX-LX70, however connections for the VSX-LX60 are the same except where noted.
5
1
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
2
1
IN
(TV/
SAT
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGN-
ABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
)
)
)
1
(CD)
3
4
4
21
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
6
IN
OUT
2
1
IN
7
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
B
P
PR
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
(
1
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGNABLE
(
VIDEO/GAME
IR
DVD/LD
1
8
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
DVD/LD
11
TV/SAT
1
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
2
IN
VIDEOAUDIO
AM LOOP
R
OUT
IN
BD
IN
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
OUT
9
MONITOR
MONI-
OUT
TOR
)
OUT
10
2
OUT
Y
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEO
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
RL
12
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/
TAPE
MD
IN
R
R
13
SUB W.
SURROUND
14
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
AUDIO
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
1Optical digital audio output(s)
Use the OUT1 and (VSX-LX70 only)OUT2 jack for
recording to a CD or MiniDisc recorder.
See Connecting digital audio sources on page 17.
The
OUT1
jack is also used for MULTI-ZONE connections.
See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 58.
2Optical and coaxial digital audio inputs (x6)
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.
See also The Input Setup menu on page 66 to assign
the inputs.
3LAN (10/100) terminal
(VSX-LX70 only)
For details, refer to the supplied operating
instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
4HDMI connectors (x4)
(VSX-LX60)
(x5)
(VSX-LX70)
Multiple inputs and one output for high-quality audio/
video connection to compatible HDMI devices.
See Connecting using HDMI on page 54.
19
SWITCHED 100 W 0.4 A MAX
AC OUTLET
SELECTABLE
CENTER
)
L
L
LR
2
SUB W.
FRONT
16
17
PRE OUT
15
MULTI CH IN
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(
)
Single
LR
SPEAKERS
FRONT
A
A
IN
18
RLRLRL
iPod
RS-232C
20
CENTERSURROUNDSURROUND BACK /
5Remote inputs (MULTI-ZONE and source)
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor
for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.
See Connecting an IR receiver on page 60.
6Control input/output
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you can
control all your equipment from a single IR remote sensor.
See Operating other Pioneer components with this
unit’s sensor on page 81.
7Component video connections (x4)
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has
component video output, such as a DVD recorder. Use
the output for connection to a monitor or TV.
See Using the component video jacks on page 16.
8AM and FM antenna terminals
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio
broadcasts.
See Connecting antennas on page 21.
9MULTI-ZONE and source outputs
Use to connect a second amplifier in a separate room.
See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 58.
10 Composite and S-video monitor outputs
Use to connect monitors and TVs.
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 14.
AC IN
B
(
)
Single
12
En
Page 13
Connecting your equipment
11 Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x6)
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks
for composite video, S-video
See Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other
video sources on page 16.
12 Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x3)
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,
tape decks, turntables, etc.
See Connecting analog audio sources on page 18.
13 Multichannel analog audio inputs
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with
multichannel analog outputs.
See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on
page 55.
14 12 V trigger jacks
Use to switch components in your system on and off
according to the input function of the receiver.
See Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 61.
15 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs
Use to connect separate amplifiers for center, surround,
surround back and subwoofer channels.
See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 58 (see
also Installing your speaker system on page 19 for
powered subwoofer connection).
16
iPod
input terminal
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio or video
source.
See Connecting an iPod on page 53.
17 RS-232C connector
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when
using Advanced MCACC or Full Band Phase Control.
See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on
page 63.
18 Speaker terminals
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround
and surround back speakers.
See Installing your speaker system on page 19.
19
AC IN
inlet
Connect the supplied power cord here.
See Plugging in the receiver on page 22.
20 Switched AC power outlet
Use to power another component in the system. Power to
the outlet switches on and off with the receiver.
See AC outlet on page 22.
1
and stereo analog audio.
(total 50 mA max.)
(100 W/0.4 A max.)
(x2)
When making cable connections
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the
top of the receiver.
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter
protecting the optical socket.
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.
About the video converter
The video converter ensures that all video sources are
output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks.
The only exception is HDMI and high-definition
component video: since these resolutions cannot be
downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the
receiver’s HDMI/component video outputs when
connecting these video sources.
If several video components are assigned to the same
input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 66),
the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-video,
then composite (in that order).
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the
Video options on page 71) OFF.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
2
03
Note
1 You must assign the input source to the S-video input to which you’ve connected your video component (see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
2 If the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some
components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 71) OFF.
13
En
Page 14
03
N
R
N
R
Connecting your equipment
Connecting your TV and DVD player
TV
VIDEOINS-VIDEO
IN
1
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
HDMI
OPTICAL
IN
1
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
2
IN
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
)
VCR 1
IN
4
IN
(
)
CD-R
1
4
ASSIGNABLE
1
1
2
IN
(
DVD/
IN
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
41
DIGITAL
VSX-LX70
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUTVIDEO OUT
3
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
IN
Y
(
DVD/
LD
3
P
PR
4
IN
Y
(BD)
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
OUT
MONI-TOROUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGNABLE
21
1
OUT
Y
)
B
B
P
PR
3
2
IN
Y
B
B
P
PR
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
31
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEOOPTICAL
24
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONITOR
OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEOAUDIO
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AUDIORL
ANALOG OUT
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
RL
L
PHONO
IN
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SURROUND
R
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA
AUDIO
SURROU
1
12 V T
1Connect the
MONITOR OUT
video jack to a video
input on your TV.
Use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable to connect to
the composite video jack, or for higher quality video, use
an S-video cable to connect to the S-video jack.
2Connect a composite or S-video output on your
DVD player to the
DVD/LD VIDEO
or
DVD/LD S-VIDEO
input.
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-video
cable.
3Connect a coaxial-type1 digital audio output on
your DVD player to the
COAXIAL IN 1 (DVD/LD
) input.
Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.
4Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD
player to the
DVD/LD AUDIO
inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,
you can connect these instead. See also Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 55.
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
1
IN
(TV/
SAT
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
)
CD-R
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
VSX-LX70
)
)
1
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
IN
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
LD
3
IN
P
B
4
P
R
21
4
IN
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
OUT
P
R
41
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGNABLE
21
OUT
Y
)
P
B
P
R
3
IN
Y
P
B
P
R
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
31
MONITOR
OUT
S-VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEOAUDIO
GAME 1
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO /
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
R L
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SURROUND
R
SURROU
1
12 V T
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA
14
En
DVD player
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together
with a TV and DVD player, with S-video or composite
video connections. Different TVs and DVD players may
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUTVIDEO OUT
324
S-VIDEOOPTICAL
AUDIORL
ANALOG OUT
offer alternative connections. See also Using the
component video jacks on page 16 if your TV and/or DVD
player has component video inputs/outputs. If your DVD
player offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see
Blu-ray disc player
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 55.
Note
1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When you set
up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
Page 15
Connecting your equipment
N
R
M
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together
with a Blu-ray disc player, with S-video or composite
video connections. See also Using the component video jacks on page 16 if your Blu-ray disc player has
component video inputs/outputs. If your Blu-ray disc
player offers multi-channel analog audio outputs, see
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 55.
1Connect a composite or S-video output on your Bluray disc player to the
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-video
cable.
2Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output on
your Blu-ray disc player to the
Connect using an optical cable.
3Connect the stereo audio outputs on your Blu-ray
disc player to the
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.
• If your Blu-ray disc player has multi-channel analog
outputs, you can connect these instead. See also
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on
page 55.
BD VIDEO
BD AUDIO
or
BD S-VIDEO
OPTICAL IN 2 (BD)
inputs.
input.
input.
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
other set-top box
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
VSX-LX70
OPTICAL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN
(TV/
SAT
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
)
1
(CD)
)
)
4
21
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
41
HDMI
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
OUT
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
IN
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
B
P
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
(
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
(
1
DVD/LD
(BD)
2
ASSIGNABLE
VIDEO/GAME
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
MONITOR
OUT
S-VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEOAUDIO
DVD/LD
TV/SAT
VIDEO /
GAME 1
OUT
IN
BD
IN
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
RL
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SURROUND
R
SURROU
1
12 V T
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 m A
03
DIGITAL OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEOAUDIORL
AV OUT
STB
1Connect the audio/video outputs on the set-top
box to the
TV/SAT AUDIO
and
VIDEO
inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable and a
video or S-video
2
cable.
2Connect an optical-type3 digital audio output from
your set-top box to the
OPTICAL IN 1 (TV/SAT
) input.
Use an optical cable for the connection.
Note
1 If your Blu-ray disc player only has an coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using an coaxial cable. When
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The System Setup menu on page 39).
2See The Input Setup menu on page 66 to assign the S-VIDEO 2 input to the TV/SAT input function if you make this connection.
3 If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
4 If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
4
15
En
Page 16
03
R
F
R
F
Connecting your equipment
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR
and other video sources
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and
outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video
devices, including DVD/HDD recorders and VCRs.
3If the device can output digital audio, connect an
optical-type
the
Use an optical cable for the connection.
• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR2 outputs.
1
digital audio output from the recorder to
OPTICAL IN 3 (DVR/VCR1
) input.
2
VSX-LX70
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
OPTICAL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN
(TV/
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
SAT
)
)
)
1
1
(CD)
4
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
LD
3
B
P
PR
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGNABLE
21
OUT
Y
)
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
31
VIDEOAUDIORL
AV OUT
OUT
MONITOR
MONI-
OUT
DVD/LD
TOR
OUT
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
1
IN
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEOAUDIO
S-VIDEOAUDIORL
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
RL
AV IN
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR-
ROUND
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
VIDEO S-VIDEO
L
L
CENTE
LR
2
)
123
DVR, VCR, etc.
1Connect the audio/video outputs of the video
player/recorder to the
DVR/VCR1 AUDIO
and
VIDEO
inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio
connection and a video or S-video cable for the video
connection.
• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR2 IN inputs.
2If the device can record, connect the
AUDIO
and
VIDEO
outputs to the recorder’s audio/
DVR/VCR1
video inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio
connection and a video or S-video cable for the video
connection.
Using the component video jacks
Component video should give superior picture quality
when compared to composite or S-video. You can also
take advantage of progressive scan video (if your source
and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable,
flicker-free picture. See the manuals that came with your
TV and source component to check whether they are
compatible with progressive-scan video.
VSX-LX70
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
1
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN(
DVR/
)
VCR 1
4
IN
(
)
CD-R
1
4
ASSIGNABLE
1
1
2
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
2
1
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
Y
B
P
PR
COMPONENT
HDMI
1
2
3
4
VIDEO
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
IN
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
B
P
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
PR
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
B
P
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
FM UNBAL 75
IR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
(BD)
2
ASSIGNABLE
21
OUT
Y
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
P
B
PR
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
31
S-VIDEO
DVD player
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONITOR
OUT
IN
IN
TV
1Connect the component video outputs of your source
to a set of
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
Connect using a three-way component video cable.
Ω
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
1
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
2
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
VIDEOAUDIO
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
RL
L
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
1
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
CENTE
12 V TRIGGER
)
inputs.
L
L
LR
2
16
En
Note
1 • In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only).
• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 66).
Page 17
Connecting your equipment
E
2
L
L
L
03
• Since they are assignable, it doesn’t matter which
component video inputs you use for which source.
After connecting everything, you’ll need to assign the
component video inputs—see The Input Setup menu
on page 66.
2Connect the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
jacks to the
component video inputs on your TV or monitor.
Use a three-way component video cable.
Connecting digital audio sources
This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs,
allowing you to connect digital audio components for
playback and for making digital recordings.
Most digital components also have analog connections.
See Connecting analog audio sources on the following
page if you want to connect these too.
VSX-LX70
OPTICAL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN
(TV/
SAT
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
(CD)
2
IN
COAXIAL
)
)
)
1
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
(
1
IN
(BD)
2
IN
(
VIDEO/GAME
DVD/LD
ASSIGNABLE
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
P
B
PR
1)
31
MONITOR
OUT
S-VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEOAUDIO
GAME 1
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO /
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
IN
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
IN
B
P
41
PR
2
4
IN
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
OUT
PR
41
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
RL
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SURROUND
R
(
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
AUDIO
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
DC OUT 12V/
CENT
)
1Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output on
your digital component to the
OPTICAL IN 4 (CD-R
)
input.
Use an optical cable for the connection.
2For recording equipment, connect one of the
optical-type DIGITAL outputs to a digital input on the
recorder.
Use an optical cable to connect to the DIGITAL OUT1 or
(VSX-LX70 only) OUT2 (OUT1 is shown in the
illustration).
2
About the WMA9 Pro decoder
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9
Professional
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using a coaxial or
optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9 Procompatible player. However, the connected PC, DVD player,
set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro format
audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital output.
3
(WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to
12
OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.
Note
1 • If your digital component only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial cable. When
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 66).
• The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this receiver. You can assign them when setting up
the receiver (see also The Input Setup menu on page 66).
2 • You must switch ZONE 3 ON in Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 60 to hear audio from the DIGITAL OUT1.
• In order to record some digital sources, you must make analog connections as explained in Connecting analog audio sources below.
3 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.
17
En
Page 18
03
N
T
Connecting your equipment
1Connect the analog audio outputs of the source
AUDIO
Connecting analog audio sources
This receiver features three stereo audio-only inputs. Two
of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with
audio recorders.
One of the audio inputs (PHONO) is a dedicated
turntable input which should not be used for any other
type of component. This input also has a grounding
terminal that most turntables require.
component to one of the
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable.
• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc.,
connect the analog audio outputs (OUT) to the
analog audio inputs on the recorder.
2
Turntables only:
PHONO
the
Connect the stereo audio outputs to
inputs.
• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the
inputs.
ground terminal on this receiver.
2
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a
built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs
instead.
urntable
Connecting a component to the front
panel inputs
VSX-LX70
PRE OUT
AUDIO
FM UNBAL 75
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONITOR
MONI-
OUT
DVD/LD
TOR
OUT
TV/SAT
1
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
2
IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEOAUDIO
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
BD
IN
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
IN
R
R
IN
SUB W.
OUT
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
L
R
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
ANTENNA
PHONO
AM LOOP
Ω
CENTER
)
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(
)
Single
LR
L
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
LR
2
MULTI CH IN
IN
iPod
RS-232C
FRONT
A
RL
CE
The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack
(VIDEO), an S-video jack (S-VIDEO), stereo analog audio
inputs (AUDIO L/R) and an optical digital audio input
(DIGITAL). You can use these connections for any kind of
audio/video component, but they are especially
convenient for portable equipment such as camcorders,
video games and portable audio/video equipment.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel
door to access the front video connections.
PARAMETER
PHONES
AUDIOVIDEO
(TUNE)
(ST)(ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
TUNER EDITSPEAKERSBAND
USB
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
MCACC
SETUP MIC
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO LRAUDIO
SIGNAL
SELECT
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
SB ch
PROCESSING
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
18
En
1
Tape deck, etc.
OUT
PLAY
IN
REC
RL
AUDIO IN/OUT
VIDEO OUTPUT
DIGITAL OUT
TV game, video camera, etc.
• Select these inputs using INPUT SELECT (remote) or
the INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to select
VIDEO/GAME 2.
Page 19
Connecting your equipment
Installing your speaker system
To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound capabilities connect front, center, surround and surround back
speakers, as well as a subwoofer. Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer speakers—no subwoofer or
no center speaker, or even no surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front left and right speakers only are
necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just
one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal). You can use speakers
with a nominal impedance between 6 Ω to 16 Ω (please see Switching the speaker impedance on page 73 if you plan to
use speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).
Subwoofer
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
Front
left
Center
Front
right
CAUTION
These speaker terminals carry
HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage.
To prevent the risk of electric
shock when connecting or
disconnecting the speaker
cables, disconnect the power
cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
03
OPTICAL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN
(TV/
SAT
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
(CD)
)
)
)
1
4
21
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
HDMI
1
2
3
4
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
IN
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
B
P
P
R
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
P
R
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
(
1
DVD/LD
(BD)
2
ASSIGNABLE
(
VIDEO/GAME
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
)
2
1
OUT
Y
B
P
P
R
3
IN
Y
B
P
P
R
1)
31
MONITOR
OUT
S-VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEOAUDIO
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
OUT
VCR 1
IN
OUT
VCR 2
IN
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
OUT
IN
CD-R/
TAPE
MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
DVR/
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
R L
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
VSX-LX70
Surround
left
Surround
back left
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to
match these up with the terminals on the speakers
themselves.
AC OUTLET
B
SELECTABLE
AC IN
(
)
Single
PRE OUT
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(
)
Single
LR
L
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
LR
2
MULTI CH IN
)
FRONT
CENTERSURROUNDSURROUND BACK /
RLRLR L
RS-232C
A
IN
iPod
SWITCHED 100 W 0.4 A MAX
Surround
right
Surround
back right
Caution
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
19
En
Page 20
03
Connecting your equipment
Bare wire connections
Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is
properly prepared with about 10 mm of insulator stripped
from each wire, and the exposed wire strands twisted
together (fig. A).
To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns
until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire
(fig. B). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal
until the wire is firmly clamped (fig. C).
fig. Afig. Bfig. C
10 mm
Important
• Please refer to the manual that came with your
speakers for details on how to connect the other end
of the speaker cables to your speakers.
• Other connections on page 53 provides greater detail
on alternate speaker setups, such as using speaker
system B (page 56), bi-amping (page 57) and biwiring (page 57).
• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the
THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your
subwoofer.
Placing the speakers
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines
should help you to get the best sound from your system.
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the
other speakers should be at about ear-level when
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very
high on a wall is not recommended.
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers
2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.
• When placing speakers near the TV, we recommend
using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent
possible interference, such as discoloration of the
picture when the TV is switched on. If you do not have
magnetically shielded speakers and notice
discoloration of the TV picture, move the speakers
farther away from the TV.
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a
narrower angle.
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so
that the sound of the center channel is localized at
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of
the front left and right speakers.
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
• Surround and surround back speakers should be
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and
titled slight downward. Make sure the speakers don’t
face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should
be more directly behind the listener than for home
theater playback.
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away
from the listening position than the front and center
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound
effect.
• To achieve the best possible surround sound, install
your speakers as shown below. Be sure all speakers
are installed securely to prevent accidents and
improve sound quality.
Front
left
Surround
left
Surround back leftSurround back right
Center
Listening position
Single surround back speaker
Subwoofer
Front
right
Surround
right
Caution
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.
This not only improves sound quality, but also
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of
external shocks such as earthquakes.
20
En
Page 21
Connecting your equipment
N
The diagrams below show suggested surround and
surround back speaker orientation. The first diagram (fig. A) shows orientation with one surround back speaker (or
none) connected. The second (fig. B) shows orientation
with two surround back speakers connected.
º
90º to 120
LS
LS
RS
0º to 60
LS
SB
RS
SBL
SBL
SBR
fig. Afig. B
• If you have two surround back speakers THX
recommends placing them together and the same
distance from your listening position (see below).
THX speaker system setup
If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the
diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the
surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating
speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the
listener.
L
CR
RS
º
SBR
Connecting antennas
The supplied antennas provide a simple way to listen to
AM and FM radio. If you find that reception quality is
poor, an outdoor antenna should give you better sound
quality—see Connecting external antennas below.
VSX-LX70
MULTI-ZONE
OPTICAL
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN
(TV/
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IN
IR
1
MAIN
OUT
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
)
SAT
2
IN
)
3
IN
)
1
4
21
4
IN
(CD)
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
41
DIGITAL
CONTROL
IN
IN
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
P
B
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
PR
(
VIDEO/GAME
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
(BD)
2
ASSIGNABLE
2
1
OUT
Y
P
B
PR
3
IN
Y
P
B
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONITOR
OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEOAUDIO
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
CD-R/
TAPE
MD
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R L
AM loop antenna
1Assemble the stand as shown in the illustration.
fig. Afig. Bfig. C
AUDIO
PHONO
IN
CD
IN
OUT
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
PRE OUT
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(
)
Single
LR
L
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
LR
2
)
MULTI CH IN
IN
iPod
RS-232C
FRONT
A
RL
1
03
CE
SL
Surround
SBL SBR
Surround back
SR
Surround
• If you have two surround back speakers THX
recommends placing them together and the same
distance from your listening position for the following
THX modes: THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE and THX GAMES MODE.
See also THX Audio Setting on page 52 to make the
settings that will give you the best sound experience
when using the Home THX modes (page 29).
Note
1 Do not use any antennas other than the supplied AM loop antenna.
• Bend the stand in the direction indicated (fig. A).
• Clip the loop into the stand (fig. B).
• It’s possible to fix the AM antenna to a wall (fig. C).
Before fixing, make sure that the reception is
satisfactory.
2Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna
wires.
3Press the
AM LOOP
antenna terminal tabs to open
and insert one wire into each terminal.
4Release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.
5Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and point in
the direction giving the best reception.
Avoid placing near computers, television sets or other
electrical appliances and do not let it come into contact
with metal objects.
21
En
Page 22
03
Connecting your equipment
FM wire antenna
•Connect the FM wire antenna to the FM UNBAL
75 Ω in the same way as the AM antenna.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception connect an external FM
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω.
75 Ω coaxial cable
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of
vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally
outdoors.
Outdoor antenna
AM LOOP
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
Plugging in the receiver
Only plug in after you have connected all your
components to this receiver, including the speakers.
Caution
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The
power cords should be routed so that they are not
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent
service company for a replacement.
• Do not use any power cord other than the one
supplied with this unit.
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose
other than that described below.
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular
use, e.g., when on vacation.
• Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone
out before unplugging.
1Plug the supplied power cord into the
on the back of the receiver.
2Plug the other end into a power outlet.
AC IN
socket
22
En
FM UNBAL 75
5 m to 6 m
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
Ω
AC outlet
Power supplied through this outlet is turned on and off by
the receiver’s power switch. Total electrical power
consumption of connected equipment should not exceed
100 W (0.4 A).
Caution
• Do not connect a TV set, monitor, heater, or similar
appliance to this unit’s AC outlet.
• Do not connect appliances with high power
consumption to the AC outlet in order to avoid
overheating and fire risk. This can also cause the
receiver to malfunction.
• Since a subwoofer or power amplifier can exceed the
100 W maximum when playing sources at a high
volume, this type of equipment should not be
connected to the AC outlet.
Page 23
Controls and displays
Chapter 4:
Controls and displays
Front panel
Illustration shows the VSX-LX70 front panel
16247583
STANDBY/ON
04
VSX-LX70
ADVANCED
PHASE
MCACC
PHASE
AUTO SURR/
MCACC
STREAM DIRECT
POSITION
SELECTOR
CONTROL
INPUT
CONTROL
910 1112 13
PARAMETER
AUDIOVIDEO
(TUNE)
PHONES
(ST)(ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
14
TUNER EDITSPEAKERSBAND
MCACC
USB
SETUP MIC
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALERHDMI
HOME
STANDARD
ADVANCED
THX
SURROUND
SURROUND
15161718
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEOLRAUDIO
SIGNAL
SELECT
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
SB ch
PROCESSING
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
MASTER
VOLUME
23252122241920
1
INPUT SELECTOR
Use to select an input source.
2
STANDBY/ON
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power
indicator lights when the receiver is on.
3
PHASE CONTROL – Press to switch on/off Phase
Control or Full Band Phase Control (page 10).
MCACC POSITION – Press to switch between
MCACC presets (page 31).
AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT –
Surround (
listening.
dial
page 28
) or Stream Direct
Press to select Auto
(page 30)
4Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control (see
Operating range of remote control unit on page 24).
5Character display
See Display on page 25.
6
PHASE CONTROL
indicator
– Lights to indicate
Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control is selected
(page 10).
ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights when one of
the MCACC presets (page 31) is selected.
1
Digital Precision Processing indicator – Lights to
indicate digital processing (for example, it
disappears when Pure Direct (page 30) is on, or when
listening through the multichannel analog inputs).
Note
1 The MCACC indicator does not light when the MCACC preset memory currently being selected has not been corrected with Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional or when EQ is set to OFF in the Audio parameter menu (see Setting the Audio options on page 70).
23
En
Page 24
04
Controls and displays
DIGITAL VIDEO SCALER
Resolution is set to a setting other than PURE (for
example, when the video input signal is upscaled)
(page 70).
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMIequipped component; lights when the component is
connected (page 54).
7Listening mode buttons
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening
mode (page 29).
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard
decoding and to switch between the various
2 Pro Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 28).
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between
the various surround modes (page 29).
8
MASTER VOLUME
9Front panel controls
To access the front panel controls, push gently on the
lower third portion of the panel with your finger.
10
SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker system (page 56).
11
AUDIO PARAMETER
Use to access the Audio options (page 70).
12
VIDEO PARAMETER
Use to access the Video options (page 71).
13
TUNER EDIT
Use with / to memorize and name stations for recall
(page 36).
14 BAND
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 36).
15 MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE/REC SEL controls
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTIZONE listening on page 58) use these controls to control the sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTIZONE controls on page 60).
You will also need to use the REC SEL controls when
recording a source (see Making an audio or a video recording on page 72).
16 SIGNAL SELECT
Use to select an input signal (page 31).
dial
indicator
– Lights when
17
SBch PROCESSING
Selects the surround back channel mode (page 31) or
virtual surround back mode (page 32).
18
STEREO/F.S.SURR
Switches between the stereo playback mode (page 30)
and the Front Stage Surround Advance mode (page 30).
19
PHONES
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.
20
SETUP
Press to access the System Setup menu (see page 39).
21
/// (TUNE/ST
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround
sound system (see page 39). Use the TUNE / buttons
to find radio frequencies and use ST / to find preset
stations (page 36).
22
RETURN
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.
23
USB
Connect a USB audio device for playback.
See the separate manual for HOME MEDIA GALLERY
(VSX-LX70) or USB playback on page 34 (VSX-LX60).
24
MCACC SETUP MIC
Use to connect the supplied microphone.
25
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
See Connecting a component to the front panel inputs on
page 18.
jack
interface
) /
jack
ENTER
Operating range of remote control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
• There are obstacles between the remote control and
the receiver’s remote sensor.
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the
remote sensor.
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting
infrared rays.
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another
infrared remote control unit.
30
30
7 m
24
En
Page 25
Controls and displays
4
Display
04
1
SIGNAL
AUTO
PCM
HDMI
DIGITAL
ANALOG
STREAM DIRECT
PRO LOGIC
2
ADV.SURROUND
THX
STEREO
AB
SP
indicators
21387651012131
2
LCR
SL S SR
SBL SB
LFE
N
eo
STANDARD
SLEEP
17
DIGITAL
WMA9 Pro
DTS
AAC
CD
CD-R
DSD
SBR
: 6
49
FULL BAND
2
HD
MULTI-ZONE
PCM
S.RTRV
TUNER
PHONO iPod
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input
signal automatically (page 31).
2Program format indicators
These change according to which channels are active in
digital sources.
L – Left front channel
C – Center channel
R – Right front channel
SL – Left surround channel
S – Surround channel (mono)
SR – Right surround channel
SBL – Left surround back channel
SB – Surround back channel (mono)
SBR – Right surround back channel
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the ((( ))) indicators light when
an LFE signal is being input)
3Digital format indicators
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format
is detected (
DSDPCM
lights during DSD (Digital Stream
Direct) to PCM conversion with SACDs).
4
S.RTRV
Lights when the Sound Retriever is switched on
5
MULTI-ZONE
(page 70)
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 58).
6
FULL BAND
Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on
(page 10).
7
PHASE CONTROL
Lights when the Phase Control or Full Band Phase
Control is switched on (page 10).
8Sound processing indicators
Light according to the active Audio parameter(s)
and/or ANALOG ATT (page 73)
9
V.SB
.
Lights during Virtual surround back processing
10
TUNER
indicators
(page 70)
(page 32)
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.
11
PHASE CONTROL
DIALOG E
SOUND
Hi-Bit/Sampling
DVD
BDP
201615182119
TV
DVR
ATT
DNR
OVER
V.S B
VIDEO
HDMI
TUNED
STEREO
MONO
HMG
[ 1 ]
RDS
EON
USB
[ 2 ]
[ 3 ]
SR+
dB
[ 4 ]
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is
being received in auto stereo mode.
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using
the MPX button.
11
EON/RDS
indicators
EON – Lights when the EON mode is set (flashes
during EON reception). The indicator lights when
the current station carries the EON service (page 38).
RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is received
(page 37).
12
SOUND
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or tone
controls feature is selected (page 70).
13 Master volume level
Shows the overall volume level. –80dB indicates the
minimum level, and +12dB indicates the maximum level.
14
SR+
Lights when the SR+ mode is switched on (page 62).
15
STREAM DIRECT
Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected (page 30).
.
16 Speaker indicators
Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B (page 56).
17 Listening mode indicators
THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is
selected.
ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the
Advanced Surround modes has been selected.
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched
on (see Listening in stereo on page 30).
STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard
Surround modes is switched on (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
18
SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 73).
.
19 Matrix decoding format indicators
2 PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate
2 Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 28).
25
En
Page 26
04
Controls and displays
26
En
Neo:6 –
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing
When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver
(page 28)
20 Character display
Displays various system information.
21 Input source indicators
Light to indicate the input source you have selected.
Remote control
Illustration shows the VSX-LX70 remote control
TUNE
ENTER
TUNE
REC
T.DI S P
SYSTEM OFF
BDTV CTRL
ZONE2/3
TUNER
RECEIVER
DIMMER
GENRE
CLASS
CH
ENTER
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TV CH
VOL
INFO
MUTE
REC STOP
JUKEBOX
HDD
DVD
CH
CH
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV.SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
HDMI
RETURN
ANALOG
ATT
DISC
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
1
SELECT
2
CD
CD-R
DVDTV
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
DVR1
GALLERY
i Pod
SLEEP
+
SR
3
4
D.ACCESS
CLEAR
+
10
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
STST
BAND
SETUP
PROGRAM
GUIDE
PTY SEARCH
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV VOL
SELECT
TV/DTV
A
EON
MPX
BCDE
AUDIO SUBTITLE
DISP
PHOTO
STATUS
SIGNAL SEL
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHASE
RECEIVER
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according
to component control using the following system (press
the corresponding input source button to access):
• Green – Receiver controls (see below)
• Red – DVD controls (page 80)
• Blue – Tuner controls (page 36)
• Yellow – iPod controls (page 53)
• White – Other controls (page 80)
1
RECEIVER
.
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
2 INPUT SELECT
Use to select the input source (use SHIFT for INPUT
SELECT ).
3Input source buttons
Press to select control of other components (see
Controlling the rest of your system on page 76).
4Number buttons and other receiver/component
controls
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio
frequency (page 36) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.
DISC (ENTER) can be used to enter commands for TV or
DTV, and also to select a disc in a multi-CD player.
Press RECEIVER first to access:
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and
select the amount of time before sleep (page 73).
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 73).
ANALOG ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an
analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 73).
SR+ – Switches the SR+ mode on/off (page 62).
GENRE – Automatically selects the most appropriate
Advanced Surround mode for the genre of the source
currently being played back (this feature is available
only when a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control is connected to this receiver via HDMI)
(page 33).
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,
then use / to adjust the level (page 51).
Press TUNER first to access:
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio
station directly using the number buttons (page 36).
CLASS – Switches between the three banks (classes)
of radio station presets (page 36).
5Tuner/component control buttons/
SETUP
These button controls can be accessed after you have
selected the corresponding input source button (DVD, DVR1, TV, etc.). The BAND, T.EDIT and PTY SEARCH
tuner controls are explained from page 36. Press
RECEIVER first to access the following controls:
A PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio options
(page 70).
V PARAMETER – Use to access the Video options
(page 71).
SETUP – Use to access the System Setup menu
(page 39).
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).
Page 27
Controls and displays
04
6
///
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround
sound system (page 39) and the Audio or Video options
(page 70 or 71). Also used to control DVD menus/options
and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use the
TUNE / buttons to find radio frequencies and use ST
/ to find preset stations (page 36).
7
TV CONTROL
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to
the TV CTRL button. Thus if you only have one TV to hook
up to this system assign it to the TV CTRL input source
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV
CTRL button (see page 76 for more on this).
TV – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.
TV VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.
INPUT SELECT – Use to select the TV input signal.
TV CH +/– – Use to select channels.
8Component control buttons
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a
component after you have selected it using the input
source buttons.
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after
you have selected the corresponding input source button
(for example DVD, DVR1 or TV). The following controls
can be accessed when listening to the built-in tuner:
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak then switching
to mono will improve the sound quality (page 36).
DISP – Switches between named station presets and
radio frequencies (page 37). Also used to display
RDS information (page 38).
EON – Use to search for programs that are
broadcasting traffic or news information (page 38).
9
STATUS
Press to check selected receiver settings (page 74).
10
MULTI OPE
Use this button to perform multi operations (page 78).
11
SHIFT
Press to access the controls outlined in white boxes (for
example, INPUT SELECT ), or to display the currently
selected input source in the remote control LCD.
12
SOURCE
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the
receiver (see page 76 for more on this).
13 Character display (LCD)
This display shows information when transmitting
control signals.
The following commands are shown when you’re setting
the remote to control other components (see Controlling the rest of your system on page 76):
(TUNE/ST) /
buttons
ENTER
SETUP – Indicates the setup mode, from which you
choose the options below.
PRESET – See Selecting preset codes directly on
page 76.
LEARNING – See Programming signals from other
remote controls on page 76.
MULTI OP – See Multi Operation and System Off on
page 78.
SYS OFF – See Multi Operation and System Off on
page 78.
DIRECT F – See Direct function on page 78.
RENAME – See Renaming input source names on
page 78.
ERASE – See Erasing one of the remote control button
settings on page 77.
RESET – See Resetting the remote control presets on
page 77.
READ ID – See Confirming preset codes on page 77.
14
RECEIVER
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to
select the green commands above the number buttons
(ANALOG ATT, etc.)). Also use this button to set up
surround sound (page 8, page 39). With SHIFT, this
selects the MULTI-ZONE control (page 58), shown in the
display as RCV/Z2, RCV/Z3.
15
VOL +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
16
MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
17 Receiver controls
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 31).
SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back
channel mode (page 31).
STEREO/F.S.SURR – Switches between the stereo
playback mode (page 30) and the Front Stage
Surround Advance mode (page 30).
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode
(page 29).
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to
switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and
Neo:6 options (page 28).
ADV.SURR – Use to switch between the various
surround modes (page 29).
18
PHASE – Press to switch on/off Phase Control or Full
Band Phase Control (page 10).
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets
(page 31).
S.DIRECT – Press to select Auto Surround (page 28)
or Stream Direct (page 30) listening.
27
En
Page 28
05
T.DISP
PHOTO
.DS
STEREO/
OO
Listening to your system
Chapter 5:
Listening to your system
Important
• The listening modes and many features described in
this section may not be available depending on the
current source, settings and status of the receiver.
See Listening modes with different input signal formats on page 92 for more on this.
Auto playback
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
•While listening to a source, press
SURR
/
STREAM DIRECT
)2 for auto playback of a source.
1
S.DIRECT (AUTO
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see
how the source is being processed.
3
• VSX-LX70 only – When listening to the FM Radio, the
Neural THX feature is selected automatically (see
Using Neural THX on page 36 for more on this).
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in
surround sound. However, the options available will
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source
you’re listening to.
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using surround back channel processing on page 31.
Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround sound for
stereo and multichannel sources.
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHASE
RECEIVER
•While listening to a source, press
(
STANDARD SURROUND
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround
encoded, the proper decoding format will
automatically be selected and shows in the display.
With two channel sources, you can select from:
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to movie sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to music sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME– Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to video games
• 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound
from the surround speakers is mono)
• Neo:6 CINEMA – 6.1 channel sound, especially
suited to movie sources
• Neo:6 MUSIC – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited
to music sources
7
• Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially
suited to music sources
With multichannel sources, if you have connected
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you
can select (according to format):
• 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available
when you’re using two surround back speakers)
• 2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
STANDARD
).
8
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
MCACC S.DIRECT
4
STANDARD
6
5
28
En
Note
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround sound below
for more on these decoding formats).
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones or select the multichannel analog inputs.
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 30.
3 VSX-LX70 only – Neural THX is selected when Neural Music Direct is accessed with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input. However, Stereo is selected when
a category other than Neural Music Direct is accessed.
4 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.
5 If surround back channel processing (page 31) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if the Surround back speaker setting on page 42 is set to anything but Normal (default)), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
6 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension,
and Panorama. See Setting the Audio options on page 70 to adjust them.
7 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 70).
8 VSX-LX70 only – Neural THX can be selected with the FM input. Also, Neural THX can be selected with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input.
Page 29
Listening to your system
T.DISP
PHOTO
T.DISP
PHOTO
05
• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure
decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital
Surround EX)
• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS-ES encoded sources
• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS encoded sources
Using the Home THX modes
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like
what you hear in a cinema.
Different THX options will be available depending on the
source and the setting for surround back channel
processing (see Using surround back channel processing
on page 31 for more on this).
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
•Press
With two channel sources, press THX (HOME THX)
repeatedly to select a matrix-decoding process for the
THX CINEMA mode (see Listening in surround sound
above for an explanation of each process):
With multichannel sources, press THX
repeatedly to select from:
THX (HOME THX
) to select a listening mode.
• 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
• 2PRO LOGIC+THX
• Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
• THX GAMES MODE
(
HOME THX)
• THX CINEMA – Gives you cinema-quality sound from
your home theatre system using all the speakers in
your setup
• 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX – Especially suited to
movie sources, this allows you to hear 7.1 channel
playback with 5.1 channel sources
• THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
• THX Select2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
• THX MUSICMODE – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel
playback with 5.1 channel sources
• THX GAMES MODE – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel
playback from the output of a video game console
Using the Advanced surround effects
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety
of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced
Surround modes are designed to be used with film
soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks
to see which you like.
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
•Press
repeatedly to select a listening mode.
• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic
• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog
• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of
1
• MONOFILM – Creates surround sound from mono
• ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
• EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field
• TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both
• ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games
• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs
• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound
• ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock
• UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources
• EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
• PHONES SURR. – When listening through
ADV.SURR (ADVANCED SURROUND
2
soundtracks
special effects
soundtracks
mono and stereo TV sources
and/or pop music
source, using all of your speakers
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall
surround.
)
3
Note
1 • If you only have one surround back speaker connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX, THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE and THX GAMES
MODE are not available. With 2-channel input signals, however, 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX can be selected.
• You can’t use the THX modes when headphones are connected.
2 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup. For more on
this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 31.
• If you press ADV.SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURR. mode will automatically be selected.
3 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).
29
En
Page 30
05
T.DISP
PHOTO
T.DISP
PHOTO
T.DISP
PHOTO
Listening to your system
Tip
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is
selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the
EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 70.
Listening in stereo
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source
through just the front left and right speakers (and
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker
settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro
multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
•While listening to a source, press
STEREO/F.S.SURR
for stereo playback.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
• STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround
settings and you can still use the Midnight,
Loudness, and Tone functions.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below for more on this.
• F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below for more on this.
Using Front Stage Surround Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to
create natural surround sound effects using just the front
speakers and the subwoofer.
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound
effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.
FOCUS position (Recommend)
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
WIDE position
Front left
speaker
1
Front right
speaker
Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the
pure analog or digital sound source (see Stream direct with different input signal formats on page 95).
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
1 While listening to a source, press S.DIRECT
/
STREAM DIRECT) to select the mode you want.
SURR
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel
display to see how the source is being processed.
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 28.
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual
mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay and
hi-bit/hi-sampling settings. You will hear sources
according to the number of channels in the signal.
• PURE DIRECT – Analog and PCM sources are heard
without any digital processing.
from the Speaker B in this mode.
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
PHASE
RECEIVER
MCACC S.DIRECT
2
No sound is output
(
AUTO
30
En
RECEIVER
•While listening to a source, press
STEREO/F.S.SURR
to select Front Stage Surround Advance modes.
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on
this.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround
sound effect directed to the center of where the front
left and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
Note
1 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if Auto MCACC Setup is performed. For more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8.
2 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this is a problem.
Page 31
Listening to your system
T.DISP
PHOTO
CH
CH
DISP
Selecting MCACC presets
• Default setting: MEMORY 1
If you have calibrated your system for different listening
positions
1
, you can switch between settings to suit the
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a
video game close to the TV).
STEREO/
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
•While listening to a source, press
POSITION
).
MCACC (MCACC
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets2
or to switch calibration off. See Data Management on
page 48 to check and manage your current settings.
Choosing the input signal
You need to hook up a component to both analog and
digital inputs on the receiver to select between input
3
signals.
T.DISP
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
•Press
SIGNAL SEL (SIGNAL SELECT
input signal corresponding to the source component.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• AUTO – This is the default setting. The receiver
selects the first available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.
• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.
• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
SBch
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
4
) to select the
• PCM – Only PCM signals are output.5 The receiver
selects the first available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL.
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, 2 DIGITAL lights with
Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus decoding, 2 HD
lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding, DTS lights with DTS
or DTS-HD decoding, and WMA9 Pro lights to indicate
that a WMA9 Pro signal is being decoded.
Using surround back channel processing
• Default setting: SBch ON
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back
channel will be generated, but the material may sound
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround
back channel processing off).
The table below indicates when you will hear the
surround back channel when playing various kinds of
sources (
speaker(s)).
•Press
the surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
=Sound plays through surround back
T.DISP
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
SBch (SBch PROCESSING
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
) repeatedly to cycle
• SBch ON – 6.1 or 7.1 decoding is always used (for
example, a surround back channel will be generated
for 5.1 encoded material)
• SBch AUTO – Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example,
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
• SBch OFF – Maximum 5.1 playback
05
Note
1 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system. These presets
can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39, either of
which you should have already completed.
2 • You can’t use these settings when MULTI CH IN is switched on, and they has no effect when headphones are connected.
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.
3 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96 kHz/24 bit) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats. With
other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN, TUNER, PHONO and iPod input functions are all fixed to ANALOG).
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections
(page 17) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.
4 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 70 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.
5 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.
31
En
Page 32
05
Listening to your system
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode
When you’re not using surround back speakers,
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround
back channel through your surround speakers. You can
choose to listen to sources with no surround back
channel information, or if the material sounds better in
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.
The table indicates when you will hear the virtual
surround back channel (
=Virtual surround back
•Press
the virtual surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is
1
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is
SBch (SBch PROCESSING
) repeatedly to cycle
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
switched off
channel is active).
SBch
Type of source
Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES 5.1 ch sources with
6.1 ch flagged
Dolby Digital/DTS and DVD-Audio 5.1 ch
sources
Dolby Digital/DTS/PCM and DVD-Audio stereo
sources
Analog 2-channel (stereo) sourcesON
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/Dolby Digital
Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro encoded and
PCM 6.1 ch/7.1 ch sources
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz) encoded and PCM 5.1 ch
sources
a. Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.
b. Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.
c. Sound is output from the surround back speakers only when THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE or THX GAMES MODE is selected.
d. Advanced surround mode may not be available depending on the input signal.
Processing /
Virtual SB
mode
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
Multichannel
sources
c
c
c
c
Standard / THX
Stereo sources
2Pro Logic IIx2Pro LogicNeo:6
a
b
a
b
a
b
Advanced
surround
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
32
En
Note
1 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the THX, stereo, Front Stage
Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the Surr Back setting is set to NO in the Speaker Setting on
page 50.
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.
Page 33
Listening to your system
Using the genre synchronizing function
This feature automatically selects the most appropriate
Advanced Surround mode for the source currently being
played back on a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control connected to this receiver via HDMI.
on HDMI Control, see About HDMI on page 55.
CD
CD-R
GALLERY
+
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
DIMMER
GENRE
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
ANALOG
ATT
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
SLEEP
SR
HOME MEDIA
1
For details
05
•Press
RECEIVER
, and then press
GENRE
while the
source assigned to a genre is being played back.
The most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the
source being played back is automatically selected.
Note
1 • This feature is available only when the source being played back is assigned to a genre. When the source has no genre assigned to, NO GENRE appears
showing that this feature is not available.
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to ON. When OFF is selected, CANNOT SELECT appears showing that this feature is not available (see About HDMI
on page 55).
33
En
Page 34
06
USB playback
Chapter 6:
USB playback
VSX-LX60 only (VSX-LX70 – See the separate manual for HOME MEDIA GALLERY)
Using the USB interface
It is possible to listen to two-channel audio1 using the
USB interface on the front of this receiver. Connect a
USB mass storage device
1Switch on the receiver and your TV.
2Press
USB (SHIFT+iPod
No USB appears in the OSD.
3Connect your USB device.
The USB terminal is located on the front panel.
PARAMETER
AUDIOVIDEO
(TUNE)
PHONES
(ST)(ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
This receiver
Loading appears in the OSD as this receiver starts
recognizing the USB device connected. After the
recognition, a playback screen appears in the OSD and
playback starts automatically.
USB
Play
Relax Your Body
Kevin Jackson
We are all one
WMA / 128Kbps
You can also select and play back your favorite file from
the folder/file list displayed in the OSD. For details, see
Selecting a file from the folder/file list for playback below.
2
as shown below.
) to switch to the
TUNER EDITSPEAKERSBAND
MCACC
USB
SETUP MIC
USB mass
storage device
-55dB
FLD004TRK0001
0:01
List
3
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO LRAUDIO
4
Folder/File number
Repeat or Shuffle
Song name
Artist name
Album name
Elapsed time
File format/Bit rate
SIGNAL
SELECT
SB ch
PROCESSING
USB
input.
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic controls on the
remote for USB playback.
ButtonWhat it does
Starts normal playback.
Pauses/unpauses playback.
/ Press and hold during playback to start
scanning.
/ Press to skip to previous/next track.
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat Folder, Repeat One and Repeat All.
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle On
and Shuffle Off.
DISPPress repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display.
/During playback, press to skip to previous/next
track; when browsing, press to move to
previous/next levels.
TOP
MENU
Press to select the ROOT folder list; when
browsing a ROOT folder list, press to switch the
ROOT folder list to the playback screen.
RETURN Press to switch the playback screen to the
folder/file list; when browsing a folder/file list,
press to return to the previous level.
Selecting a file from the folder/file list
for playback
The folder/file list displays folders and files stored on your
USB device hierarchically. You can select and play back
a file of your choice by using /// and ENTER.
34
En
Note
1 This includes playback of WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC files (except files with copy-protection or restricted playback).
2 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players (MP3 players)
of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback.
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of
data that may occur when connected to this receiver.
• With large amounts of data, it may take longer for the receiver to read the contents of a USB device.
3 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.
4 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the OSD instead; when neither the album name nor
the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.
• Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
Page 35
USB playback
06
1Press
RETURN
to display the folder/file list for the
USB device connected.
USB
Play
Relax Your Body
Kevin Jackson
We are all one
WMA / 128Kbps
2Press
/
and then press
-55dB
USB
List
We are all one
[ 01
Relax Your Body.wm
[ 02
The Color of Life...
[ 03
Ain't Thang Wrong...
[ 04
Oh My God.wma
[ 05
Watcha Need.wma
Enter
FLD004TRK0001
0:01
to select the file you want to play back,
ENTER
to confirm your selection.
-55dB
Return
]
]
]
]
]
• Press RETURN to switch to the upper hierarchy of the
current folder or file.
• To switch to the previous/next folder or file within the
current hierarchy, press /.
Important
If a USB ERR message lights in the display, try following
the points below:
ErrorWhat it means
USB ERR1
The power requirements of the USB device
are too high for this receiver.
USB ERR2 The USB device is incompatible.
USB ERR3 See USB interface (VSX-LX60 only) on page 88
for more on this error message.
• AAC (MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding) – Sampling
rates: 8 kHz to 48 kHz; Bit rates: 16 kbps to 384 kbps
(128 kbps or higher recommended); File extension:
.m4a; Apple lossless encoding: No
Other compatibility information
• VBR (variable bit rate) MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC
playback: Yes
1
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) protection
compatible: Yes (DRM-protected audio files will not
play in this receiver).
About MPEG-4 AAC
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is at the core of the
MPEG-4 AAC standard, which incorporates MPEG-2
AAC, forming the basis of the MPEG-4 audio
compression technology. The file format and extension
used depend on the application used to encode the AAC
file. This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes
®
bearing the extension ‘.m4a’. DRM-protected files will
not play, and files encoded with some versions of
®
iTunes
may not play.
Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
About WMA
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.
• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched
off.
• Select another input source (like DVD/CD), then
switch back to USB.
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the
device) for USB power.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB
device is incompatible.
Compressed audio compatibility
Note that although most standard bit/sampling rate
combinations for compressed audio are compatible,
some irregularly encoded files may not play back. The list
below shows compatible formats for compressed audio
files:
• MP3 (MPEG-1/2/2.5 Audio Layer 3) – Sampling rates:
8 kHz to 48 kHz; Bit rates: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (128
kbps or higher recommended); File extension: .mp3
• WMA (Windows Media Audio) – Sampling rates:
8 kHz / 48 kHz; Bit rates: 5 kbps to 384 kbps (128 kbps
or higher recommended); File extension: .wma;
WMA9 Pro and WMA lossless encoding: No
Note
1 Note that in some cases playback time will not be displayed correctly.
The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates
that this receiver can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. This unit plays back WMA files
encoded using Windows Media Player bearing the
extension ‘.wma’. Note that DRM-protected files will not
play, and files encoded with some versions of Windows
Media Player may not play.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
About DRM
DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a
technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on
devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment)
used to record it. For detailed information, please see the
instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC
and/or software.
35
En
Page 36
07
INFO
REC
Using the tuner
Chapter 7:
Using the tuner
Listening to the radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving station presets on page 36 for more on how to do this.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
BD TV CTRL
DVD TV
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
GALLERY
DVR1 i Pod
TUNER
SLEEP
DIMMER
1Press the
2Use the
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
TUNER
BAND
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
PTY SEARCH
TV VOL
ANALOG
ATT
TV/DTV
button to select the tuner.
button to change the band (FM or
AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Automatic tuning
To search for stations in the currently selected band,
press and hold TUNE / for about a second. The
receiver will start searching for the next station,
stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for
other stations.
Manual tuning
To change the frequency one step at a time, press
TUNE /.
High speed tuning
Press and hold TUNE / for high speed tuning.
Release the button at the frequency you want.
Improving FM stereo sound
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators don’t light when
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press
the MPX button to switch the receiver into mono
reception mode. This should improve the sound quality
and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.
CLEAR
+
10
TUNE
STST
ENTER
TUNE
GUIDE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
SELECT
REC
CLASS
DISC
CH
ENTER
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
TV CH
VOL
INFO
INFO
REC
TV/DTV
A
REC STOP
EON
MPX
BCDE
AUDIO SUBTITLE
HDD
DISP
CH
T.DISP
PHOTO
SIGNAL SEL
STATUSSTATUS
SBch
STANDARD
THX
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
JUKEBOX
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
ADV.SURR
Using Neural THX
VSX-LX70 only
This feature uses Neural Surround™ technology to
achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.
• While listening to FM radio, press S.DIRECT for
Neural THX listening.
See About Neural Surround on page 91 for more on this.
The Neural THX mode can be selected also with the
STANDARD button.
MUTE
DVD
CH
Tuning directly to a station
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on
the remote control.
1Press the
2Use the
TUNER
button to select the tuner.
BAND
button to change the band (FM or
AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3Press
D.ACCESS
(Direct Access).
4Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of
the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This
receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three
banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When
saving an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see page 36) is
also stored.
TV/DTV
A
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
SLEEP
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
DIMMER
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
HDMI
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
CLEAR
+
10
TUNE
STST
ENTER
TUNE
GUIDE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
SELECT
CLASS
CH
ENTER
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
TV CH
VOL
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
PTY SEARCH
TV VOL
ANALOG
ATT
MPX
DISC
AUDIO SUBTITLE
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to the radio on page 36 for more on this.
MUTE
REC STOP
EON
JUKEBOX
BCDE
HDD
DVD
DISP
CH
CH
PHOTO
T.DISP
STEREO/
SBch
SIGNAL SEL
F.S.SURR
ADV.SURR
STANDARD
THX
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
RECEIVER
36
En
Page 37
Using the tuner
07
2Press
T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT
).
The display shows STATION MEMORY, then a blinking
memory class.
3Press
press
CLASS
ST /
to select one of the three classes then
to select the station preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a station
preset.
4Press
ENTER
.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop
blinking and the receiver stores the station.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your station
presets.
1Choose the station preset you want to name.
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.
2Press
The display shows STATION NAME, then a blinking
cursor at the first character position.
3Input the name you want.
Choose from the following characters for a name up to
four characters long.
Use / to select a character, / to set the position,
and ENTER to confirm your selection.
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press
DISP when listening to a station to switch the display
between name and frequency.
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See
Saving station presets above if you haven’t done this
already.
1Press
2Press
TUNER
to select the tuner.
CLASS
to select the class in which the station
is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.
3Press ST
/
to select the station preset you
want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote
control to recall the station preset.
An introduction to RDS
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information—the name of the station and the kind of
show they’re broadcasting, for example.
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.
You can search the following program types:
NEWS – News
AFFAIRS – Current Affairs
INFO
– General Information
SPORT – Sport
EDUCATE – Educational
DRAMA – Radio plays, etc.
CULTURE – National or
regional culture, theater,
etc.
SCIENCE – Science and
technology
VARIED – Usually talkbased material, such as
quiz shows or interviews.
POP M – Pop music
ROCK M – Rock music
EASY M – Easy listening
LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical
music
CLASSICS – ‘Serious’
classical music
OTHER M – Music not
fitting above categories
WEATHER – Weather
reports
FINANCE – Stock market
reports, commerce,
trading, etc.
CHILDREN – Programs for
children
SOCIAL – Social affairs
RELIGION – Programs
concerning religion
PHONE IN – Public
expressing their views by
phone
TRAVEL – Holiday-type
travel rather than traffic
announcements
LEISURE – Leisure interests
and hobbies
JAZZ – Jazz
COUNTRY
NATION M – Popular
music in a language other
than English
OLDIES – Popular music
from the ’50s and ’60s
FOLK M – Folk music
DOCUMENT
– Country music
– Documentary
1
Note
1 In addition, there are three other program types, ALARM, NO DATA and NO TYPE. ALARM is used for emergency announcements. You can’t search
for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. NO DATA and NO TYPE appears when a program type cannot be found.
37
En
Page 38
07
CLEAR
DISC
CLEAR
DISC
Using the tuner
Searching for RDS programs
One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to
search for a particular kind of radio program. You can
search for any of the program types listed on the previous
page.
REC STOP
MPX
AUDIO SUBTITLE
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PTY SEARCH
+
10
STST
PROGRAM
GUIDE
TV CONTROL
CH
ENTER
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
ENTER
RETURNRETURN
TUNE
1 Press the BAND button to select the FM band.
2 Press the PTY SEARCH button.
SEARCH shows in the display.
3 Press ST
/ to select the program type you
want to hear.
4 Press ENTER to search for the program type.
The system starts searching through the station presets
for a match. When it finds one, the search stops and the
station plays for five seconds.
5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press
ENTER within the five seconds.
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.
If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find
that program type at the time of the search.
Displaying RDS information
Use the DISP button to display the different types of RDS
information available.
•Press
DISP
3
for RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
• Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
• Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio
station.
•Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of
program currently being broadcast.
• Current tuner frequency
JUKEBOX
EON
BCDE
HDD
DVD
DISP
CH
CH
T.DISP
STEREO/
SBch
SIGNAL SEL
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
THX
MCACC S.DIRECT
PHASE
2
1
Using EON
When EON (Enhanced Other Network information) is
turned on, the receiver jumps to an EON-linked
broadcast when it begins, even if a receiver function
other than the tuner is being used. It can’t be used in
areas that EON information isn’t transmitted and when
FM broadcast stations don’t transmit PTY data. When the
broadcast ends, the tuner returns to the original
frequency or function.
+
10
CH
ENTER
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
1Press the
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
TUNE
STST
PROGRAM
BAND
ENTER
TUNE
RETURNRETURN
button to select the FM band.
2 Press EON to select one of the possible modes.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
• EON TA (Traffic Announcement) – Sets the tuner to
pick up traffic information when it is broadcast.
• EON NEWS – Sets the tuner to pick up news when it
is broadcast.
When set to TA or NEWS, the EON indicator in the
display lights (it flashes when receiving an EON
broadcast).
5
The indicator in the display lights when
the current station carries the EON service.
INFO
REC
TV/DTV
A
EON
REC STOP
MPX
BC DE
AUDIO SUBTITLE
HDD
DISP
CH
MUTE
JUKEBOX
DVD
CH
4
6
38
En
Note
1 RDS is only possible in the FM band.
2 RDS searches station presets only. If no stations have been preset, or if the program type could not be found among the station presets NO PTY is
displayed. FINISH means the search is complete.
3 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
• If you see NO RADIO TEXT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch to the
PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).
• In the PTY display, NO DATA may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.
4 EON is only possible in the FM band.
5 You can’t search for traffic announcements and news at the same time.
6 • You cannot operate the TUNER EDIT and PTY SEARCH buttons while the EON indicator in the display is lit.
• If you want to change to a function other than the tuner when the EON indicator is flashing, press EON MODE to turn EON off.
Page 39
The System Setup menu
Chapter 8:
The System Setup menu
• Surr Back System – Specifies how you are using your
Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu
The following section shows you how to make detailed
settings to specify how you’re using the receiver (for
example, if you want to set up two speaker systems in
separate rooms), and also explains how to fine-tune
individual speaker system settings to your liking.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
DIMMER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVDTV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
SLEEP
ANALOG
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PTY SEARCH
TV VOL
TV/DTV
PROGRAM
GUIDE
1Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,
disconnect them.
2Press
the
SETUP
RECEIVER
button.
on the remote control, then press
2
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the
/// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
• Press SETUP at any time to exit the System Setup
menu.
3Select the setting you want to adjust.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
55.0
:Exit
CLEAR
+
10
TUNE
STST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
INFO
REC
dB
CH
LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
1
DISC
surround back speakers (see Surround back speaker
setting on page 42).
• Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see
Manual MCACC setup on page 42).
• FULL BAND PHASE CTRL – Calibrates and
automatically corrects the frequency-phase
characteristics of the speakers connected (see Full Band Phase Control on page 47).
• Data Management – Checks your MCACC presets
and manages them through copying, renaming or
deleting (see Data Management on page 48).
• Manual SP Setup – Specifies the size, number,
distance and overall balance of the speakers you’ve
connected (see Manual speaker setup on page 50).
• Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to
the digital, HDMI, component video and S-video
inputs (see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
• Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect
how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup menu on page 67).
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8, you can
customize your setup options below. You can calibrate
your system differently for up to six different MCACC
3
presets
positions depending on the type of source (for example,
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game
close to the TV).
, which are useful if you have different listening
4
08
• Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
on page 8 for a quick and effective automatic
surround setup. See Automatic MCACC (Expert)
below for a more detailed setup.
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.
2 • Note that when editing items in the Manual MCACC menu, you will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC
before pressing SETUP
• You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) input source is selected (in either
the main or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to ON (page 60), you can’t use the System Setup menu.
3 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1–6 (or M1–6) until you rename them in Data Management on page 48.
4 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.
.
39
En
Page 40
08
The System Setup menu
Important
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved
during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
• The screen saver will automatically appear after three
minutes of inactivity.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
1Select ‘
then press
Auto MCACC
ENTER
.
’ from the System Setup menu
If the System Setup screen is not displayed, refer to
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
2Make sure ‘
MCACC preset
DVD/LD
-
55.0
dB
1. Auto MCACC
:Exit
Normal (default)
3
then select
START
Surr Back System
[Normal (default)]
Save SYMMETRY to
[M1. MEMORY 1 ]
START
ENTER:Start :Cancel
’ is selected,2 select an
-
55.0
dB
4
.
For a fully customized Auto MCACC setup, select
CUSTOM and set the following parameters using /:
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Output Setup
[Normal (default)]
Save SYMMETRY to
[ M1. MEMORY 1 ]
CUSTOM
ENTER:Next
: Cancel
dB
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Custom Menu
ALL
Speaker Setting
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro. & S-Wave
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
ENTER:Next
Channel Level
-
55.0
: Return
dB
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
SYMMETRY
M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ
[ M2.MEMORY 2 ]
FRONT ALIGN
[ M3.MEMORY 3 ]
THX Speaker [ NO ]
[ START ]
ENTER:Start
-
: Return
55.0
-
55.0
• Custom Menu – The default is ALL (recommended),
but you can limit the system calibration to only one
setting (to save time) if you want.
options are ALL, Keep SP SYSTEM,
6
The available
7
Speaker
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance and EQ
Pro. & S-Wave.
• EQ Type (only available when the Custom Menu
above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – This determines how
the frequency balance is adjusted.
After a single calibration is performed, each of the
following three correction curves can be stored
1
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default)
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left
and right speakers to flatten the frequency amplitude
characteristics. ALL CH ADJUST is a ‘flat’ setting where
all the speakers are set individually so no special
weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN
sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker
settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and
right channels).
• THX Speaker(only available when the Custom Menu above is ALL orSpeaker Setting) – Select YES if you
are using THX speakers (set all speakers to SMALL),
otherwise leave it set to NO.
• Stand.Wave Multi-Point(only available when the Custom Menu above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – In
addition to measurements at the listening position,
you can use two more reference points for which test
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration
for several seating positions in your listening area.
Place the microphone at the reference point
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone
placement will be at your main listening position:
5
dB
2nd reference
point
12
Main listening
position
3
3rd reference
point
When you’re finished settings the options, press
RETURN to go back to the Auto MCACC main setup.
8
9
40
En
Note
1 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the CUSTOM setup screen (step 2).
2 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker setting
on page 42 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 3.
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can
rename it later in Data Management on page 48).
4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and
FRONT ALIGN).
5 Select DEMO, and then press ENTER to activate the demo mode of Auto MCACC. In the demo mode, no settings are saved and no errors occur. When
the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.
6• The EQ Pro. & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 45 for more on this.
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see
Setting the Audio options on page 70.
• The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Full Band Phase Control on page 47.
7The Keep SP SYSTEM option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 50) unchanged.
8 If you selected ALL as your Custom Menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN settings.
9 Switch the Multi-Point setting OFF if you only use one listening position.
Page 41
The System Setup menu
08
3Connect the microphone to the
MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
AUDIOVIDEO
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
(ST)(ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
MULTI – ZONE &
SIGNAL
STEREO/
SB ch
SOURCE/REC SEL
TUNER EDITSPEAKERSBAND
USB
RETURN
MCACC
SETUP MIC
SELECT
CONTROL ON/OFF
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO
PROCESSING
F.S.SURR
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a
table or a chair.
4Follow the instructions on-screen.
• Make sure the microphone is connected.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically
detected every time you switch on the system. Make
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.
•See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
page 9 for notes regarding high background noise
levels and other possible interference.
5Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish
outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This
may result in incorrect speaker settings.
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise! or Check Microphone) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9) and verifying
the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
6If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in
the OSD.
1
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 7.
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the
power and check the speaker connections. If there
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /
to select the speaker and / to change the setting
(and number for surround back) and continue.
7Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
ENTER
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.
DVD/LD
1. Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing
Subwoofer Check
…
0.0
:Cancel
DVD/LD
dB
1. Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing… ( 6/11)
Surround Analysis
Speaker System [ OK ]
Channel Level [ OK ]
Speaker Distance [ ]
-
55.0
:Cancel
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
• If you selected a Stand.Wave Multi-Point setup (in
step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd
and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at
your main listening position.
8The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press
to go back to the System Setup menu.
DVD/LD
5a. MCACC Data Check
1. Speaker Setting
2. Channel Level
3. Speaker Distance
4. Standing Wave
5. Acoustic Cal EQ
6. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
ENTER:Next
-
55.0
:Return
dB
dB
.
dB
RETURN
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
System Setup menu (starting on page 39).
Note
1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting in Custom Menu from the Auto MCACC CUSTOM menu.
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings.
You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 50.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
2
41
En
Page 42
08
The System Setup menu
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check
screen:
• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers
you’ve connected (see page 50 for more on this)
• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker
system (see page 43 or 51 for more on this)
• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers
from the listening position (see page 44 or 51 for
more on this)
1
• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 44 for more on this)
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency
balance of your speaker system based on the
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 45
for more on this)
• FULL BAND PHASE CTRL – The original
characteristics of group delay of the speakers
calibrated and the targeted characteristics can be
displayed graphically (see Full Band Phase Control on
page 47 for more on this).
Press ENTER after you have finished checking each
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back
to the System Setup menu.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
• Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in
another room (see Speaker B setup on page 56).
• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-
amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your front speakers on page 57).
• ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals for an independent system in
another zone (see MULTI-ZONE listening on page 58).
3When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,
you should have already completed Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
on page 8.
You only need to make these settings once (unless you
change the placement of your current speaker system or
add new speakers).
Caution
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at
high volume.
42
En
Surround back speaker setting
•Default setting: Normal (default)
There are several ways you can use the surround back
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a
normal home theater setup where they are used for the
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system
in another room.
1Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the System Setup
menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
55.0
:Exit
dB
DVD/LD
2. Surr Back System
Normal (default)
Front :Normal
Center :Normal
Surr :Normal
SB :Normal
--.-
:Finish
dB
Important
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing
SETUP (step 2 in Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu on page 39). When Manual
MCACC is selected while MCACC is set to OFF, the
selection screen for the MCACC memory appears.
Select a memory to adjust manually.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1. MEMORY 1
ENTER:Next
-
55.0
:Cancel
dB
2Select the surround back speaker setting.
• Normal (default) – Select for normal home theater
use with surround back speakers in your main
(speaker system A) setup.
Note
1 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal surround
sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.
Page 43
The System Setup menu
08
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it
about ear level at your normal listening position.
Press SETUP to display the System Setup menu
before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If
the microphone is connected while the System Setup
menu is not being displayed, the display will change
to the Auto MCACC setup menu. See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9 for notes
regarding high background noise levels and other
possible interference.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up
the volume to the middle position.
1Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the System Setup
menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 39 if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
55.0
:Exit
DVD/LD
dB
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance
c. Standing Wave
d. EQ Adjust
e. EQ Professional
-
55.0
:Return
dB
2Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to
make these settings in order.
• Fine Ch Level – Make fine adjustments to the overall
balance of your speaker system (see Fine Channel Level below).
• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on
page 44).
• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing Wave on page 44).
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
on page 45:
• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance
of your speaker system while listening to test tones
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 45).
• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 45).
Fine Channel Level
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
You can achieve better surround sound by properly
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. The
following setting can help you make detailed
adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 50.
1Select ‘Fine Ch Level’ from the Manual MCACC
setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance
c. Standing Wave
d. EQ Adjust
e. EQ Professional
2Adjust the level of the left channel.
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want
to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.
3Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels
(
+/–10dB
) as necessary.
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker you
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds
like both tones are the same volume, press to confirm
and continue to the next channel.
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
change depending on which speaker you select.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
4When you’re finished, press
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
-
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
3a. Fine Channel Level
CAUTION
Loud test tones will
:Return
DVD/LD
3a. Fine Channel Level
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Ref.Ch : L
+0.5dB
ENTER:Next :Cancel
DVD/LD
3a. Fine Channel Level
R L
L +0.5dB
R -1.5dB
C [ +1.0dB ]
SL [ -9.5dB ]
SR [ +10.0dB ]
be output.
SBL[ -9.5dB ]
SBR[+10.0dB ]
SW [ -1.5dB ]
:Finish
Please wait... 20
:Cancel
0.0
dB
0.0
dB
RETURN
.
-
20.0
dB
43
En
Page 44
08
The System Setup menu
Fine Speaker Distance
•Default setting: 3.00 m (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening
position at the same time. The following setting can help
you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve
using the Manual speaker setup below.
1Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC
setup menu.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance
c. Standing Wave
d. EQ Adjust
e. EQ Professional
2Adjust the distance of the left channel from the
listening position.
3Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance
as necessary.
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected
to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in
terms of speaker distance from 0.01 to 9.00 meters.
DVD/LD
3b. Fine SP Distance
SL L
3.05 m
L
R [2.81 m]
C 1.92 m]
SL [2.23 m]
[2.34 m]
SR
:Finish
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the
target channel. From the listening position, face the two
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
you and between your arm span.
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,
press to confirm and continue to the next channel.
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
change depending on which speaker you select.
-
55.0
:Return
0.0
dB
DVD/LD
3b. Fine SP Distance
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Ref.Ch : L
3.00 m
ENTER:Next :Cancel
dB
DVD/LD
3b. Fine SP Distance
SBL SL
SBL 1.92 m
SBR [1.83 m]
[2.34 m]
SW
:Finish
1
0.0
dB
0.0
dB
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
4When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Standing Wave
• Default setting: ON
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC
3
presets.
1Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC
setup menu.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance
c. Standing Wave
d. EQ Adjust
e. EQ Professional
2Select ‘ON’ (if it is not already selected) then adjust
the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.
• Filter Ch – Select the channel to which you will apply
the filter(s): Main (all except center channel and
subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).
• TRIM(only available when the filter channel above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to
compensate for the difference in output post-filter).
• f / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where f
represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q
is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the
bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the
amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).
3When you’re finished, press
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
2
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
3c. Standing Wave
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Filter Ch SW
TRIM [ +12.0
No. 1 2 3
f [ 63
Q [ 3.0
ATT
[ 2.5
RETURN
Hz
] [ 110
Hz
] [ 250
] [ 8.0 ] [ 5.0 ]
dB
] [ 6.0
dB
] [ 6.0
:Finish
.
-
55.0
dB
dB
]
Hz
]
dB
]
44
En
Note
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be difficult to
compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).
2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave feature in the Audio Parameter menu. See Setting the Audio options on page 70 for more on this.
3 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.
• When Standing Wave is selected for a MCACC preset memory where S-WAVE is set to OFF in the Audio parameter, S-WAVE ON is automatically
selected.
Page 45
The System Setup menu
08
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room
equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your
room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that
can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’
equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the
adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on
page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39, you can
also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency
balance that suits your tastes.
1Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance
c. Standing Wave
d. EQ Adjust
e. EQ Professional
2Confirm that the MCACC preset shown in the
display is the one you want to adjust, then select
START.
DVD/LD
3d. EQ Adjust
MCACC:M1. MEMORY 1
[ START ]
ENTER:Next :Cancel
3Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your
liking.
DVD/LD
3d. EQ Adjust
63Hz [ 0.0]
MCACC : M1
125Hz [ 0.0]
Ch [SBL]
250Hz [ 0.0]
dB
500Hz [ 0.0]
1kHz 0.0
2kHz [ -1.0]
4kHz [
63
125
8kHz [ -4.5]
16kHz [ -7.0]
:Finish
Use the / buttons to select the channel.
Use the / buttons to select the frequency and /
to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to
the top of the screen and use the / buttons to select
the next channel.
•The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until
OVER! disappears from the display.
250
1k2k4k
500
8k
16k
TRM
TRIM [
1
-
55.0
:Return
-
55.0
-
55.0
-2.0]
0.0]
dB
dB
dB
Tip
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the
speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or
lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM
feature. Use / to select TRIM then use / to
raise or lower the channel level for the current
speaker.
4When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It
can also provide you with a graphical output of the
frequency response of your room.
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb
characteristics, select EQ Pro. & S-Wave (or ALL) for the
Custom Menu setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 39 to calibrate the room automatically. This should
provide a balanced calibration that suits the
characteristics of your listening room.
If you still aren’t satisfied with the results, the manual
Advanced EQ setup (below) provides a more customized
calibration of your system using the direct sound of the
speakers. This is done with the help of a graphical output
that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer
(with software available from Pioneer — see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 63).
How to interpret the graphical output
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in
milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this
usually takes about 100 ms or so).
2
Note
1 When EQ Adjust is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the Audio parameter, EQON is automatically selected.
2 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer
(with software available from Pioneer—see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 63 for more on this).
45
En
Page 46
08
The System Setup menu
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how
your room is responding to certain frequencies.
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are
taken into account automatically (compensation is
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency
measurements can be examined both with and without
the equalization performed by this receiver.
1
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
according to your room characteristics
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing
the time that is best for system calibration with your
particular room characteristics.
The graph below shows the difference between
conventional acoustic calibration and professional
calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the
microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).
Level
Test tone
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
016080
Conventional Acoustic Cal.
EQ calibration range
Time
(in msec.)
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of
30~50ms to compensate for two major factors that will
influence the sound of most rooms:
• Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –
Depending on your room, you may find that lower
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the
measurement is done too late.
Level
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
016080
Conventional Acoustic Cal.
EQ calibration range
Low
frequencies
High
frequencies
Time
(in msec.)
• Reverb characteristics for different channels –
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for
each channel. Since this difference increases as the
sound is influenced by the various room
characteristics, it is often better to capture a
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of
channel frequencies/sounds.
Level
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
016080
Conventional Acoustic Cal.
EQ calibration range
Left
surround
Right
Surround
Time
(in msec.)
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often
not necessary to make a 30~50ms setting. Later time
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what
works best for your particular room.
Note that changing the room (for example, moving
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1 Select ‘EQ Professional’ then press ENTER.
DVD/LD
3. Manual MCACC
a. Fine Channel Level
b. Fine SP Distance
c. Standing Wave
d. EQ Adjust
e. EQ Professional
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
3e. EQ Professional
1. Reverb Measurement
2. Reverb View
3. Advanced EQ Setup
e.EQ Professional
ENTER:Next
-
55.0
:Return
dB
2 Select an option and press ENTER.
• Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the
reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical
output using a PC, see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 63 to connect an RS-232C
cable before selecting this option).
• Reverb View – You can check the reverb
measurements made for specified frequency ranges
in each channel.
• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time
pe riod that w ill be us ed for frequency adjustment and
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of
your listening area. Note that customizing system
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39 and is not
necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.
46
En
Note
1 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most obvious when
comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.
Page 47
The System Setup menu
08
3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ
ON or OFF and then START.
The following options determine how the reverb
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in
Reverb View and Output PC (Data Management):
• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area without the equalization
performed by this receiver (before calibration).
• EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area with the equalization performed
by this receiver (after calibration).
1
Note that the EQ
response may not appear entirely flat due to
adjustments necessary for your listening area.
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select
Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 86
for troubleshooting information.
4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press
RETURN when you’re done.
DVD/LD
Reverb View
3e2.
M1 : EQ OFF
Ch L Fq [ 125Hz ]
dB
080160ms
-
55.0
:Return
dB
This appears according to the setting you chose in
Reverb Measurement (step 3 above). Use the /
buttons to select the channel and the frequency you want
to check. Use the / buttons to go back and forth
between the two. Note that the markers on the vertical
axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.
5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, enter the
desired time setting for calibration. Press to
proceed to the next screen, and then select START.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can
choose the time period that will be used for the final
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is
best to use the measurement results as a reference for
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we
recommend using the 30~50ms setting.
DVD/LD
3e3. Adv. EQ Setup (1/2)
Ch L Fq [ 125Hz]
Tm [30
dB
080160ms
-
55.0
-
50ms]
:Cancel
dB
DVD/LD
3e3. Adv. EQ Setup (2/2)
MCACC :M1.MEMORY 1
EQ Type SYMMETRY
Stand.Wave Multi-Point
[ NO ]
[ START ]
: Cancel
-
55.0
dB
Use the / buttons to select the channel, frequency,
and time setting. Use the / buttons to switch
between them.
You can switch between your connected speakers
(excluding the subwoofer), and display the
measurements for the following frequencies: 63Hz,
125Hz, 250Hz, 500Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, 4kHz, 8kHz and
16kHz.
Select the setting from the following time periods (in
milliseconds): 0~20ms, 10~30ms, 20~40ms, 30~50ms,
40~60ms, 50~70ms and 60~80ms. This setting will be
applied to all channels during calibration.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are
given the option to check the settings on-screen.
Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers
connected and corrects the phase distortion. This
receiver analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of
the speakers by calibrating test signals output from the
speakers with the supplied microphone, therefore
flattening the analyzed frequency-phase characteristics
during audio signal playback. This correction minimizes
group delay between the middle- and low-frequency
ranges and improves the frequency-phase
characteristics across all ranges. Furthermore, the
enhanced frequency-phase characteristics between
channels ensure better surround sound integration for
multichannel sources. For details, see Using Full Band Phase Control on page 11.
This section describes how to calibrate the frequencyphase characteristics of the speakers only. Once you
have performed calibration with Auto MCACC set as a
default setting or with CUSTOM set to ALL, the Full Band
Phase Control calibration is already done (In this case,
the previous settings are overwritten if you perform
calibration again as described here).
Note
1 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, exit the
System Setup menu and
press MCACC to select it before pressing SETUP
.
47
En
Page 48
08
The System Setup menu
1Select ‘
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
’ from the System
Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
2Select an option and press
-
55.0
:Exit
dB
DVD/LD
4. FULL BAND PASE CTRL
a. Measurement
b. Group Delay View
ENTER:Next
ENTER
:Return
.
-
55.0
dB
• Measurement – Calibrates and corrects the
frequency-phase characteristics of each speaker.
• Group Delay View – The original characteristics of
group delay of the speakers calibrated and the
targeted characteristics can be displayed
graphically.
3If you selected ‘
DVD/LD
4a. Measurement
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
Measurement
[ START ]
ENTER:Start
Measurement
-
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
4a. Measurement
Now Analyzing… ( 5/ 5)
FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
Delay Check [ OK]
Group Delay [ ]
ENTER:Start
:Cancel
’, press
ENTER
0.0
dB
:Cancel
.
When the Full Band Phase Control measurement is
finished, you can select Group Delay View to see the
results on-screen.
4If you selected ‘
Group Delay View
’, you can check
the graph showing the group delay characteristics.
dB
Tgt
Targeted characteristics
^
after correction
^
^
Org
Original characteristics
Hz
of the speakers calibrated
1
Press
RETURN
DVD/LD
4b. Group Delay View
Original & Target
Channel Front
ms
then you’re done.
-
55.0
:Return
This appears according to the setting you chose in
Measurement (Step 2 above). Use / to select the
channel you want to check.
2
Data Management
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,
allowing you to calibrate your system for different
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the
same listening position).
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).
From this menu you can check your current settings,
copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier
identification and clear any ones you don’t need.
1Select ‘Data Management’ from the System Setup
menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above if you’re not already at this screen.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
2Select the setting you want to adjust.
• MCACC Data Check – Check the settings for any of
your MCACC presets using the on-screen display
(see Checking MCACC preset data below).
• Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets
below).
• MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC preset data below).
• MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets
that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets
below).
• Output PC – See Connecting a PC for Advanced
MCACC output on page 63 for more on this.
Checking MCACC preset data
After you have completed Automatically setting up for
surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on
page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39, you can
check your calibrated settings using the on-screen
display.
3
This is useful for alternate
-
55.0
:Exit
dB
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename
c. MCACC Memory Copy
d. MCACC Memory Clear
e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
dB
48
En
Note
1 When your PC is connected to this receiver, the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of
group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC.
2 The subwoofer is excluded from correction.The super tweeter in the super high-frequency range is excluded from correction. Also, speakers theoretically
unaffected by group delay (full-range speakers, for instance) are excluded from correction. Because calibration involves the spatial characteristics, you may
not get the same results after you perform calibration again depending on your audiovisual environment and your speaker system.
3 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39,
either of which you should have already completed.
Page 49
The System Setup menu
08
1Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename
c. MCACC Memory Copy
d. MCACC Memory Clear
e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
5a. MCACC Data Check
1. Speaker Setting
2. Channel Level
3. Speaker Distance
4. Standing Wave
5. Acoustic Cal EQ
6. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
ENTER:Next
-
55.0
:Return
dB
2Select the setting you want to check.
• It is useful to do this while a source is playing so you
can compare the different settings.
3Select the MCACC preset that you want to check.
Use the / buttons if necessary to switch speakers/
settings.
2Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then
select an appropriate preset name.
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a
preset name.
3Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,
then press
RETURN
when you’re finished.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Copying MCACC preset data
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup above), we recommend
copying your current settings
1
to an unused MCACC
preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a
reference point from which to start.
1Select ‘
MCACC Memory Copy
’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename
c. MCACC Memory Copy
d. MCACC Memory Clear
e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
5c. MCACC Memory Copy
Copy
All Data
From
[ M1. MEMORY 1]
To
[ M2. MEMORY 2 ]
Start Copy [Cancel ]
-
:Cancel
55.0
dB
2Select the setting you want to copy.
• All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
• LEVEL & DISTANCE – Copies only the channel level
and speaker distance settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
3Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the
settings ‘From’ then specify where you want to copy
them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
4Select ‘Copy’ to confirm and copy the settings.
Completed shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been copied, then you automatically return to
the Data Management setup menu.
Clearing MCACC presets
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration
settings of that preset.
1Select ‘
MCACC Memory Clear
’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename
c. MCACC Memory Copy
d. MCACC Memory Clear
e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
5d. MCACC Memory Clear
Clear
M1. MEMORY 1
Start clear [Cancel]
-
55.0
:Cancel
dB
2Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
3Select ‘Clear’ to confirm and clear the preset.
Completed shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to
the Data Management setup menu.
Note
1 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39.
49
En
Page 50
08
The System Setup menu
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to
optimize the surround sound performance. You only need
to make these settings once (unless you change the
placement of your current speaker system or add new
speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your system,
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC &
Full Band Phase Control) on page 8, it isn’t necessary to
make all of these settings.
Caution
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at
high volume.
1Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ then press
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
55.0
:Exit
DVD/LD
dB
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. X-Curve
e. THX Audio Setting
2Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
• Speaker Setting – Specify the size and number of
speakers you’ve connected (see below).
• Channel Level – Adjust the overall balance of your
speaker system (page 51).
• Speaker Distance – Specify the distance of your
speakers from the listening position (page 51).
• X-Curve – Adjust the tonal balance of your speaker
system for movie soundtracks (page 52).
• THX Audio Setting – Specify whether you are using
a THX speaker setup (page 52).
3Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
pressing
RETURN
to confirm after each screen.
ENTER
-
55.0
:Return
.
dB
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC &
Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 are correct.1 Note that
this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be
set independently.
1Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. X-Curve
e. THX Audio Setting
2Choose the set of speakers that you want to set
then select a speaker size.
Use / to select the size (and number) of each of the
following speakers:
• Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.
• Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to
the front speakers).
• Surround – Select LARGE if your surround speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a
subwoofer).
• Surr Back – Select the number of surround back
speakers you have (one, two or none).
if your surround back speakers reproduce bass
frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass
frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you
didn’t connect surround back speakers choose NO.
2
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
6a. Speaker Setting
Front SMALL
Center [ SMALL ]
Surr [ SMALL ]
SB [
SW [ YES ]
X. OVER [ 80Hz ]
(THX:ALL SMALL )
SMALL x2
]
3
-
55.0
dB
:Return
Select LARGE
50
En
Note
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center and surround speakers can’t be set to LARGE
if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.
3 • If you selected Speaker B or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 42) you can’t adjust the surround back settings.
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.
Page 51
The System Setup menu
08
• Subwoofer – LFE signals and bass frequencies of
channels set to SMALL are output from the
subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the PLUS
setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass
sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the
bass frequencies that would normally come out the
front and center speakers are also routed to the
1
subwoofer).
If you did not connect a subwoofer
choose NO (the bass frequencies are output from
other speakers).
3Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
4When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the
overall balance of your speaker system, an important
factor when setting up a home theater system.
Important
• When Channel Level is selected while MCACC is set
to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC memory
appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
DVD/LD
6b. Channel Level
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY 1
ENTER:Next :Cancel
1Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. X-Curve
e. THX Audio Setting
-
55.0
:Return
-
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
6b. Channel Level
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Test Tone
AUTO
CAUTION
ENTER:Next :Return
dB
-
55.0
dB
• AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves
from speaker to speaker automatically.
3Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.
DVD/LD
6b. Channel Level
Please Wait . . . 20
Loud test tones will
be output.
2
-
20.0
:Return
dB
4Adjust the level of each channel using the
buttons.
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch speakers.
The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown
on-screen:
DVD/LD
6b. Channel Level
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L 0.0dB SR [ 0.0dB]
C [ 0.0dB] SBR [ 0.0dB]
R [ 0.0dB] SBL [ 0.0dB]
SL [ 0.0dB]
SW [ 0.0dB]
0.0
:Finish
dB
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is
3
emitted.
5When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• The channel level can be changed at any time. Press
RECEIVER then press CH LEVEL on the remote
control, and then use / to adjust the level.
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth and separation from your system,
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from
the listening position. The receiver can then add the
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.
/
2Select a setup option.
• MANUAL – Move the test tone manually from
speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel
levels.
Note
1 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not,
however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due
low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with
it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems,
the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
2 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing
back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.
3 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB
SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.
51
En
Page 52
08
The System Setup menu
Important
• When Speaker Distance is selected while MCACC is
set to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC
memory appears. Select a memory to adjust
manually.
DVD/LD
6c. Speaker Distance
Select MCACC memory.
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY 1
ENTER:Next :Cancel
-
55.0
dB
1Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. X-Curve
e. THX Audio Setting
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
6c. Speaker Distance
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L 0.50 m
C [1.50 m ]
R [1.00 m ]
2Adjust the distance of each speaker using the
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
/
buttons.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.01
meters.
3When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround
back speakers are the same distance from the
listening position.
X-Curve
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie
soundtracks.
1Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
1
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. X-Curve
e. THX Audio Setting
-
55.0
:Return
dB
DVD/LD
6d. X-Curve
X-Curve -2.0dB/oct
63
125
250
500
1k2k4k
-
55.0
8k
16k
:Finish
dB
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope
increases (to a maximum of -3.0dB/oct). Use the
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your
room size:
Room size (m2)
X-Curve (dB/oct)
≤36≤48≤60≤72≤300 ≤1000
–0.5–1–1.5–2–2.5–3
•If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and
the X-Curve has no effect.
3 Select ‘Return’ then press ENTER to finish.
THX Audio Setting
For the most effective results when using the THX Select2
Cinema and THX MusicMode listening modes (see Using the Home THX modes on page 29) with the Advanced
Speaker Array (ASA) system (see About THX on page 90),
it is required that you make the setting. See Placing the speakers on page 20 for more on THX speaker
placement.
1Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP
Setup menu.
2Specify the distance of your surround back speakers
from each other.
• 0 – 0.3m – Surround speakers within 30 cm apart
• > 0.3 – 1.2m – Surround speakers between 30 cm
• 1.2m < – Surround speakers more than 1.2 m apart.
3When you’re finished, press
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
2
DVD/LD
6. Manual SP Setup
a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. X-Curve
e. THX Audio Setting
:Return
DVD/LD
6e. THX Audio Setting
SB SP Position
0-0.3m
SBL-SBR
:Finish
(best for THX surround sound).
and 1.2 m apart.
-
55.0
dB
-
55.0
dB
RETURN
.
52
En
Note
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on page 29).
2 If you don’t have surround back speakers, or just have one, you won’t be able to select this setting (Cannot select shows in the display).
Page 53
Other connections
A
U
Chapter 9:
Other connections
09
Caution
• Make sure the power is switched off before making or
changing the connections.
Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.
Connecting your iPod to the receiver
PRE OUT
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
M LOOP
IN
ZONE2
E
R
L
CD
IN
D
OUT
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
T
IN
R
R
/
1
SUB W.
SUR-
R/
ROUND
R 1
R/
SURROUND BACK
R 2
1
12 V TRIGGER
RL
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
AUDIO
iPod
Music >
Extras >
Settings >
Shuffle Songs
Backlight
MENU
Control Dock
for iPod
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR-ROUND
SUR-ROUNDBACK
(
Single
LR
L
L
SPEAKERS
FRONT
IN
CENTER
iPod
LR
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
)
1
)
FRONT
A
RLRLR
CENTERSURROUNDS
iPod control
cable
1Set this receiver to the standby mode, and then use
the Control Dock for iPod supplied with an iPod control
2
to connect your iPod to the iPod terminal on the
cable
rear panel of this receiver.
Push the connector in until you hear it click home. To
disconnect, squeeze the connector (as shown) to release
the catch, then pull out.
2Switch the receiver on and press the
button to switch the receiver to the iPod.
source
iPod input
The front panel display shows Loading while the receiver
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.
3Use the
TOP MENU
button to display iPod Top
menu.
When the display shows Top Menu you’re ready to play
music from the iPod.
3
• If after pressing iPod the display shows No Connection, try switching off the receiver and
reconnecting the iPod to the receiver.
iPod playback
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage
of the OSD of your TV connected to this receiver.
also control all operations for music in the front panel
display of this receiver.
Finding what you want to play
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can
browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist,
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to
using your iPod directly.
1 This system is compatible with an iPod equipped with a dock connector port, iPod mini, iPod nano and iPod Photo portable device (third generation and
above). However, compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod. This receiver does not support software versions prior to iPod updater
2004-10-20 (plesae use the latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004-10-20). For supported versions, consult your local Pioneer dealer.
2 • This product is the Pioneer Control Dock for iPod (IDK-90C) for use with an iPod equipped with a dock connector port (third generation and above),
iPod mini, iPod nano or iPod Photo.
• For detailed instructions on using the iPod, please refer to the manual supplied with the iPod.
• The connected iPod should be updated with the latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004-10-20.
3 • The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver (Pioneer shows in the iPod display). Features such as the equalizer cannot
be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.
• You can’t use the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) function simultaneously with the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 58).
4 • Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod.
53
En
Page 54
09
Other connections
1Use the
press
/
buttons to select a category then
ENTER
to browse that category.
• To return to the previous level, press RETURN.
2Use the
/
buttons to browse the selected
category (e.g., albums).
•Use / to move to previous/next levels.
3Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
want to play, then press
to start playback.
1
Navigation through audio categories on your iPod looks
like this:
Playlists Songs
Artists Albums Songs
Albums Songs
Songs
Podcasts
Genres Artists Albums Songs
Composers Albums Songs
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs
Tip
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category
by selecting the All item at the top of each category
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a
particular artist.
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback controls for
your iPod:
ButtonWhat it does
Press to start playback.
Press to stop playback.
/Press and hold during playback to start scanning.
/Press to skip to previous/next song.
If you start playback when something other than a
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that
category will play.
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One,
Repeat All and Repeat Off.
ButtonWhat it does
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle Songs,
Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.
DISPPress repeatedly to change the song playback
/During playback, press to skip to previous/next
/
TOP
MENU
RETURNPress to return to the previous level.
information displayed.
playlist; when browsing, press to move to previous/
next levels.
During Audiobook playback, press to switch the
playback speed: Faster Normal Slower
Press to return to the iPod Top menu screen.
Watching photos and video content
To view photos or video on your iPod, since video control
is not possible using this receiver, you must use the main
controls of your iPod instead.
1Press
PHOTO
to switch to the iPod controls for
2
photo and video playback.
The receiver controls will be unavailable while you are
watching iPod videos or browsing photos.
2Press
PHOTO
again to switch back to the receiver
controls when you’re done.
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped
component, you can connect it to this receiver using a
commercially available HDMI cable.
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for
limitations), Video CD/Super VCD, CD and MP3. See
About the video converter on page 13 for more on HDMI
compatibility.
3
54
En
Note
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.
2 Your iPod nano currently restricts viewing of photo images stored.
3 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection
(HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support
audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, a HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components
that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.
• This receiver has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Version 1.3a. Depending on the component you
have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Also, when using a component with HDMI version 1.0, it is not possible
to output copy-controlled DVD-Audio CPPM sources from the HDMI connection.
• This receiver supports the DeepColor feature of HDMI. However, when analog signals are input, this receiver cannot output signals in DeepColor.
• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure
that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.
Page 55
Other connections
C
A
E
09
HDMI/DVI-equipped component
HDMI OUT
OPTICAL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN(TV/
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
SAT
)
)
)
)
1
1
(CD)
4
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
41
HDMI
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
OUT
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
IN
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
P
B
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
(
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
(
1
DVD/LD
(BD)
2
ASSIGNABLE
VIDEO/GAME
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
P
B
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
MONITOR
OUT
S-VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEOAUDIO
DVD/LD
TV/SAT
VIDEO /
GAME 1
OUT
IN
BD
IN
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
AM LOOP
R
ANTENNA
ZONE2ZONE2
RL
PHONO
IN
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
SUB W.
SURROUND
AUDIO
R
R
R
SURROUND B
1
12 V TRIGG
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
)
VSX-LX70
HDMI IN
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
or plasma display
1Use an HDMI cable to connect one of the HDMI IN
interconnects on this receiver to an HDMI output on
your HDMI component.
HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an HDMI-
equipped component is connected.
2Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT
interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI interconnect
on an HDMI-compatible monitor.
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be
facing right for correct alignment with the connector
on the player.
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options
on page 70 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI
audio output from your TV or plasma display (no
sound will be heard from this receiver).
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or
plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings
on your component or display. Note that some
components (such as video game units) have
resolutions that may not be converted. In this case,
use an analog video connection.
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s
digital out jacks.
About HDMI
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports
both video and audio on a single digital connection for
use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV
devices. HDMI was developed to provide the
technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital
content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant
displays.
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include
uncompressed digital video, one connector (instead of
several cables and connectors), and communication
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
HDMI, the logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Connecting the multichannel analog
inputs
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may
have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending
on whether your player supports surround back
channels).
multichannel analog audio.
1
Make sure that the player is set to output
3Use the
INPUT SELECT
button to select the HDMI
input you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).
You can also perform the same operation by using the
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing
HDMI (SHIFT+TV CTRL) on the remote control
repeatedly.
Note
1 To listen to multichannel analog audio you’ll need to switch the input signal selector to MULTI CH IN (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs below
for more on this).
55
En
Page 56
09
Other connections
1Connect the front, surround, center and subwoofer
outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding
MULTI CH
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
2If your DVD player also has outputs for surround
back channels, connect these to the corresponding
MULTI CH
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs
for surround sound playback.
1Make sure you have set the playback source to the
proper output setting.
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to
output multichannel analog audio.
2Use the
IN
.
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front
panel.
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the
input jack on this receiver.
connections.
input jacks on this receiver.
connections.
the SURROUND BACK L (Single) jack on this
receiver.
1
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
DVDTV
INPUT SELECT
CD-R
HDMI
BD TV CTRL
button to select
MULTI CH
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be
too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer
can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in
Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 68.
Speaker B setup
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off
the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in components should be the
last connection you make with your system.
• Be careful not to allow any contact between speaker
wires from different terminals.
• You can use speakers with a nominal impedance
between 6 Ω to 16 Ω (please see Switching the speaker impedance on page 73 if you plan to use
speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).
After selecting Speaker B in Surround back speaker setting on page 42, you can use the speakers connected
to the (surround back) B speaker terminals on the rear
panel to listen to stereo playback in another room. See
Switching the speaker system below for the listening
options with this setup.
1Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back
speaker terminals on the rear panel.
Connect them the same way you connected your
speakers in Installing your speaker system on page 19.
Make sure to review Placing the speakers on page 20
when placing the speakers in another room.
2Select ‘
menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 42 to do this.
Switching the speaker system
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 42, three speaker system settings are
possible using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected
Normal (default) or Front Bi-Amp, the button will
simply switch your main speaker system on or off. The
options below are for the Speaker B setting only.
•Use the SPEAKERS button on the front panel to
select a speaker system setting.
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal
(default), the button will simply switch your main
speaker system (A) on or off.
Speaker B
’ from the ‘Surr Back System’
2
56
En
Note
1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, you can’t use Midnight/Loudness, Dialog Enhancement or the SIGNAL SELECT and ANALOG
ATT buttons, as well as any of the listening modes (including STEREO and the surround back channel processing).
• When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.
• You can’t listen to your speaker B (Second Zone) system during playback from the multichannel inputs.
2 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 50. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound is heard
from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 42 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
Page 57
Other connections
PARAMETER
AUDIOVIDEO
PHONES
(TUNE)
(ST)(ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
TUNER EDITSPEAKERSBAND
MCACC
USB
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SIGNAL
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
SELECT
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO LRAUDIO
SB ch
PROCESSING
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
09
2Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from the ‘Surr Back
System’ menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 42 to specify
how you’re using the surround back speaker terminals.
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:
• SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.
• SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.
• SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).
• SP (off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as
when selecting speaker system A (above).
Bi-amping your front speakers
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different
amplifiers (in this case, to both front and surround back
terminals) for better crossover performance. Your
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
1Connect your speakers as shown below.
This illustration below shows the connections for biamping your front left speaker. Hook up your front right
speaker in the same way.
Front left
speaker
SPEAKERS
A
FRONT
CENTERSURROUND
RLR LRL(Single)
High
SURROUND BACK /
B
SELECTABLE
Caution
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals
have two metal plates that connect the High to the
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for
more information.
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing
so may damage your speakers.
Bi-wiring your speakers
The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as biamping, but additionally, interference effects within the
wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to
do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they
must have separate terminals for the high and low
frequencies). When bi-wiring, make sure you’ve selected
Normal (default) or Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 42.
•To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to
the speaker terminal on the receiver.
Caution
• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are
fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your
speakers.
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same
terminal in this way.
Low
Since both front and surround back speaker terminals
output the same audio, it doesn’t matter which set (front
or surround back) is powering which part (High or Low)
of the speaker.
• Make sure that the + / – connections are properly
inserted.
57
En
Page 58
09
R
F
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
AM LOOP
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
CD
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
DVD/LD
BD
TV/SAT
IN
IN
IN
CONTROL
OUT
PHONO
IN
IN
IN
YY
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
ANTENNA
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
IN
1
IN
2
ZONE2ZONE2
ZONE2
MAIN
(TV/
SAT
)
(BD)
(
DVD/
LD
)
1
IN
2
(
DVR/
VCR 1
)
IN
3
IN
OUT
1
IN
1
IN
2
RL
HDMI
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
IR
(
DVD/LD
)
(BD)
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
R
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
LAN (10/100)
Other connections
Connecting additional amplifiers
This receiver has more than enough power for any home
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power
your speakers.
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
ANALOG
INPUT
PRE OUT
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(
)
Single
LR
L
L
SPEAKERS
CENTER
FRONT
FRONT
A
IN
R
iPod
L
BACK
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
GER
)
X
VSX-LX70
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))
terminal only.
• The sound from the surround back terminals will
depend on how you have configured the Surround back speaker setting on page 42.
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.
• If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front
speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 50) to
LARGE.
LR
ANALOG
INPUT
ANALOG
INPUT
ANALOG
INPUT
LR
ANALOG
INPUT
LR
Front channel
amplifier
Center channel
amplifier (mono)
Powered
subwoofer
Surround channel
amplifier
Surround back
channel amplifier
MULTI-ZONE listening
This receiver can power up to three independent systems
in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTIZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is
shown below, but the number of MULTI-ZONE
connections (and the way you choose to connect them)
depends on how you want to set up your system.
ASSIGNABLE
21
Sub zone (ZONE 2)Sub zone (ZONE 3)Main zone
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
MAIN
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
IN
CONTROL
IN
IN
1
IN
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
1
IN
Y
3
IN
(
DVR/
(
DVD/
)
VCR 1
)
LD
3
IN
4
P
B
IN
(
)
CD-R
4
1
ASSIGNABLE
P
R
1
1
2
IN
(
DVD/
4
IN
2
IN
)
LD
Y
(CD)
2
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
P
B
OUT
P
DIGITAL IN
R
E
C
E
I
VE
R
I
N
P
U
T
S
E
L
E
C
T
S
Y
S
T
E
M
OF
S
O
F
U
R
C
E
C
D
DV
T
D
V
V
S
I
D
A
E
T
D
O
V
2
R2
V
I
D
E
O
DV
C
1
D
R
-
1
R
T
V
C
O
XM
i
N
P
T
R
o
A
d
D
I
O
T
R
U
O
O
N
M
E
2
R
/3
S
L
E
E
P
R
E
C
E
I
V
E
R
V
I
D
E
O
S
E
L
S
R
+
A
N
A
L
O
G
A
T
D
T
I
M
M
E
R
D
.
A
C
C
E
S
S
+
1
0
A
V
PA
R
A
T
O
C
M
L
P
E
A
T
S
M
E
S
E
R
N
U
D
I
E
S
N
C
TE
R
D
T
V
T
U
ME
N
E
N
U
C
H
L
S
T
E
S
V
E
T
E
U
L
M
P
E
N
U
E
N
T
S
E
T
R
G
T
C
U
.
A
E
T
I
D
D
E
G
I
E
T
O
R
Y
T
U
N
E
R
E
T
U
R
N
T
V
C
O
B
N
A
T
N
R
D
O
T
L
V
V
O
L
I
N
P
U
S
T
E
L
E
C
T
T
V
C
H
V
O
L
R
E
C
DT
V
M
I
N
P
F
X
O
M
U
T
E
R
E
C
S
T
A
OP
U
D
I
M
O
E
M
S
O
U
R
B
Y
D
T
I
S
I
T
P
L
E
H
D
D
S
T
A
T
U
D
S
C
V
H
S
D
I
G
N
A
L
S
E
C
L
H
S
B
MU
c
h
L
T
I
O
P
E
S
T
E
R
E
T
O
H
X
STAN
S
H
D
I
F
A
T
R
D
A
D
V
I
.
S
S
O
U
P
R
H
R
A
S
E
M
CA
CC
S
.
DI
R
ECT
R
EC
EI
V
ER
R
E
C
E
I
V
E
R
I
S
N
E
P
L
U
E
C
T
C
D
D
T
V
D
D
D
V
R
V
2
R
1
T
S
V
A
C
S
T
S
D
i
Y
L
P
A
SO
-
E
S
D
R
o
E
V
TE
T
SR
.
P
d
AC
O
PA
U
V
D
+
M
P
C
I
TV
V
R
D
E
R
M
O
S
S
I
E
A
D
C
M
S
X
ET
F
O
E
M
E
M
E
+
E
F
N
T
O
G
2
N
R
1
UP
ETER
U
U
A
0
1
U
U
D
N
I
I
O
E
D
V
R
I
E
D
CA
S
D
E
S
E
T
T
O
I
L
T
V
M
E
T
R
C
M
G
V
T
O
O
U
R
V
O
E
O
NE
E
R
R
N
O
C
M
Y
L
T
E
2
I
V
/3
E
T
E
N
U
T
R
N
M
V
T
I
A
S
E
N
E
N
P
E
C
A
A
R
P
A
X
L
T
O
U
L
CL
UT
E
T
O
N
D
D
C
G
S
E
A
I
NT
TR
IO
T
T
S
S
P
A
C
M
S
S
R
E
T
T
O
H
U
E
R
U
C
L
L
D
S
M
T
L
S
TI
U
I
S
V
E
SC
E
H
V
B
O
T
N
C
S
B
T
PE
E
IF
.
D
I
H
U
E
G
A
I
R
L
T
T
D
N
T
V
N
E
L
RE
AL
T
I
D
E
IN
T
UR
C
SEL
T
FO
IS
S
H
N
V
T
O
X
H
O
O
P
D
C
P
L
HA
H
D
M
S
MEM
B
S
UT
S
E
T
c
AN
h
E
REC
D
O
M
D
A
R
CA
R
V
Y
CH
D
S
D
CC
EI
T
E
A
R
D
V
E
V.
O
E
S
S
.
U
DI
R
R
R
R
E
C
T
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
IR receiver
R
41
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
Different sources can be playing in three zones at the
same time or, depending on your needs, the same source
can also be used (however, if iPod, HOME MEDIA
GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) is
selected in the main zone, it cannot also be selected in
the sub zone). The main and sub zones have independent
power (the main zone power can be off while one (or
both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub zones can be
controlled by the remote or front panel controls.
However, you may need to specify the volume settings in
ZONE Audio Setup on page 68.
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you have a
separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub
zone, and a separate amplifier
secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will also need a
separate amplifier if you are not using the Surround Back
System setup (see below) for your primary sub zone.
There are two primary sub zone setups possible with this
system. Choose whichever works best for you.
1
(and speakers) for your
AUDIO
ANTENNA
MULTI-ZONE
PHONO
& SOURCE
AM LOOP
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
R L
CD
IN
OUT
MONITOR
MONI-
DVD/LD
OUT
TOR
(
)
1
DVD/LD
OUT
IN
(BD)
2
ASSIGN-
OUT
ABLE
BD
21
IN
CD-R/
TAPE/
OUT
MD
TV/SAT
Y
IN
1
IN
IN
R
VIDEO /
P
B
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
SUB W.
OUT
P
R
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
VCR 1
3
IN
IN
Y
OUT
P
B
DVR/
SURROUND BACK
VCR 2
P
R
IN
1
(
VIDEO/GAME
12 V TRIGGER
1)
R L
(
DC OUT 12V/
31
)
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
L
LLRR
CENTE
2
Note
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub zone. You can,
58
En
however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.
Page 59
Other connections
D
R
O
1
U
U
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
AM LOOP
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
CD
CD-R/
TAPE/
DVD/LD
BD
IN
IN
CONTROL
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
1
IN
2
ZONE2ZONE2
ZONE2
MAIN
RL
& SOURCE
IR
(
DVD/LD
)
(BD)
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
21
SELECTABLE
L RL
(
Single
)
UNDSURROUND BACK /
B
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
DVD/LD
CONTROL
OUT
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
IR
(
DVD/LD
)
(BD)
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
C
C
TA
M
I
S
S
R
O
P
I
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
IN
1
IN
2
ZONE2
MAIN
HDMI
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
LAN (10/100)
09
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows what you can listen to in each
sub zone:
Sub ZoneInput sources available
ZONE2iPod, the built-in tuner and other analog audio
ZONE3Only digital audio sources (the input source
a.With the MULTI CH IN input, sound is output only from the front L/R
channels.
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (
1Connect a separate amplifier to the
SOURCE OUT
jacks and a TV monitor to the
ZONE & SOURCE MONITOR OUT
a
sources.
With video sources, only composite
video is possible.
must already be assigned using the The Input Setup menu on page 66) are available.
ZONE 2
)
MULTI-ZONE &
MULTI-
jacks, both on the
rear of this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.
Sub zoneMain zone
•Connect a TV monitor to the
SOURCE MONITOR OUT
MULTI-ZONE &
jacks on the rear of this
receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.
Sub zoneMain zone
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK /
SWITCHED 100 W 0.4 A MAX
AC IN
AC OUTLET
B
(
)
Single
SELECTABLE
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
MAIN
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
IN
CONTROL
1
IN
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
1
IN
Y
3
IN
(
DVR/
(
DVD/
)
VCR 1
)
LD
3
IN
4
B
P
IN
(
)
CD-R
1
4
ASSIGNABLE
P
R
1
1
2
IN
(
DVD/
4
IN
2
IN
)
LD
Y
(CD)
2
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
B
P
OUT
P
R
ASSIGNABLE
41
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
IR
OUT
(
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGNABLE
21
OUT
IN
(VIDEO/GAME
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONITOR
MONI-
OUT
TOR
)
OUT
Y
1
IN
B
P
2
IN
P
R
3
Y
B
P
P
R
1)
31
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
AM LOOP
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
R
L
CD
IN
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
BD
IN
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
TV/SAT
IN
IN
R
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
SUB W.
OUT
SUR-
DVR/
ROUND
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
SURROUND BACK
VCR 2
IN
1
12 V TRIGGER
R L
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
ZONE 3
•Connect a separate amplifier to the
PRE OUT
LR
FRONT
CENTER
SUB W.
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(
)
Single
LR
L
LLRR
SPEAKERS
FRONT
FRONT
A
IN
RL RLRL
CENTER
iPod
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
)
)
OUT1 ZONE3
digital output on the rear of this receiver.
The amplifier must have an optical digital input to make
this connection. This will allow you to hear the digital
output of a component in a second sub zone.
1
Surround Back System MULTI-ZONE setup (
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting
on page 42 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the
sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling
the main zone (for example, changing the input source or
starting playback).
Note
1 Only one sub zone is possible if you connect the OUT1 ZONE3 digital output to your second sub zone.
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
MULTI-ZONE
/REC SEL
& SOURCE
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
IR
1
OUT2
MAIN
OUT
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
IN
(
)
1
DVD/LD
CONTROL
IN
(BD)
2
IN
1
IN
IN
ASSIGN-
(TV/
)
SAT
ABLE
21
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
1
OUT
IN
Y
Y
3
IN
(
DVR/
(
DVD/
)
VCR 1
)
LD
3
IN
4
P
P
B
B
IN
(
)
CD-R
4
1
ASSIGNABLE
PR
PR
2
1
1
IN
(
DVD/
4
IN
3
2
IN
IN
)
LD
Y
Y
(CD)
2
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
P
P
B
B
OUT
PR
PR
ASSIGNABLE
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
41
ASSIGNABLE
31
DIGITAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
ANTENNA
PHON
AM LOOP
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
R L
CD
IN
OUT
MONITOR
MONI-
OUT
DVD/LD
TOR
OUT
IN
OUT
BD
IN
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
TV/SAT
IN
1
IN
IN
R
R
VIDEO /
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
SUB W.
OUT
SUR-
DVR/
ROUN
VCR 1
IN
R
OUT
DVR/
SU
VCR 2
IN
1
R L
(
DC O
TOTAL
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
ZONE 2
Sub zone (ZONE 3)
)
DIGITAL IN
Main zone
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
IN
1
OUT2
MAIN
IN
2
LAN (10/100)
ZONE2
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
IN
CONTROL
1
IN
IN
(TV/
)
SAT
OUT
2
IN
2
IN
(BD)
1
IN
Y
3
IN
(
DVR/
(
DVD/
)
VCR 1
)
LD
3
IN
4
P
B
IN
(
)
CD-R
4
1
ASSIGNABLE
PR
1
2
1
IN
(
DVD/
4
IN
2
IN
)
LD
Y
(CD)
2
IN
(BD)
COAXIAL
P
B
OUT
PR
ASSIGNABLE
41
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
ANTENNA
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
AM LOOP
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
IR
ZONE2ZONE2
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
OUT
L
R
OUT
MONITOR
MONI-
OUT
DVD/LD
TOR
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
OUT
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGNABLE
BD
21
IN
OUT
TV/SAT
Y
I
1
IN
IN
VIDEO /
P
B
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
OUT
PR
DVR/
VCR 1
3
IN
IN
Y
OUT
P
B
DVR/
VCR 2
PR
IN
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
R L
31
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
59
En
Page 60
09
Other connections
60
En
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust
the sub zone volume and select sources.
ZONE remote controls below.
AUDIOVIDEO
INPUT
SELECTOR
PHONES
STANDBY/ON
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
(ST)(ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
PHASE
CONTROL
PHASE
CONTROL
TUNER EDITSPEAKERSBAND
USB
ADVANCED
MCACC
AUTO SURR/
MCACC
STREAM DIRECT
POSITION
MCACC
SETUP MIC
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
1
See MULTI-
SIGNAL
SB ch
SELECT
PROCESSING
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO LRAUDIO
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALERHDMI
HOME
STANDARD
ADVANCED
THX
SURROUND
SURROUND
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
VSX-LX70
MASTER
VOLUME
•If you select TUNER, you can use the TUNER controls
to select a preset station (see Saving station presets
on page 36 if you’re unsure how to do this).
4
• You can’t use the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY
(VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) functions
simultaneously using the MULTI-ZONE feature.
4Use the
MASTER VOLUME
dial to adjust the
volume.
This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE
volume control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 68.
5When you’re finished, press
CONTROL
5
again to
return to the main zone controls.
You can also press the MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE ON/
OFF button on the front panel to switch off all output to
the sub zone(s).
6
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE
1Press the
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE ON/OFF
button
on the front panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
• ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2) sub
zone
• ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones
• ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary (ZONE 3) sub
zone
• MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE
feature off
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE
control has been switched ON.
2Press CONTROL to select the sub zone(s) you want.
If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle
remote controls:
ButtonWhat it does
SHIFT+
RECEIVER
INPUT
SELECT
Input
source
buttons
2
VOL +/–
Selects the sub zone you want to control,
shown in the display as RCV/Z2 (ZONE2) or
RCV/Z3 (ZONE3).
Switches on/off power in the currently
selected sub zone.
Use to select the input source in the currently
selected sub zone.
Use to select the input source directly (this
may not work for some functions) in the currently selected sub zone.
Use to set the listening volume in the currently
selected sub zone (ZONE2 only).
between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.
• When the receiver is on,
operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and
your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this
is not showing, the front panel controls affect the
main zone only.
3Use the
INPUT SELECTOR
for the zone you have selected.
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected
3
make sure that any
dial to select the source
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of
this receiver.
7
to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.
Note
1 When you use ZONE 2, you must set ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu to ZONE 2 (page 68).
2 Note that when recording, this also selects the RECOUT input source. See Making an audio or a video recording on page 72 for more on this.
3 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.
4 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone.
Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.
5 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.
6 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for awhile, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.
7 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.
Page 61
Other connections
FM UNBAL
MONI-TOR
OUT
MON
TOR
OUT
CONTROL
YY
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
M
1
IN
2
ZONE2
ZONE2
MAIN
(
DVD/
LD
)
IN
OUT
1
IN
1
IN
2
HDMI
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
IR
(
DVD/LD
)
(BD)
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
21
P
A
O
U
09
1Connect the IR receiver sensor to the
(
& SOURCE IR IN
MAIN ZONE
) jack on the rear of this
MULTI-ZONE
receiver.
If you also plan to use a separate IR receiver in the sub
room, connect this to the ZONE2 jack.
Closet or shelving unit
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
IR
OUT
(
)
1
DVD/LD
IN
(BD)
2
IN
ASSIGNABLE
21
OUT
Y
P
B
PR
3
IN
Y
P
B
PR
(
1)
VIDEO/GAME
31
AM LOOP
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
R
OUT
MONI-TOR
MONI-
OUT
DVD/LD
TOR
OUT
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
1
IN
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
2
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
Non-Pioneer
component
Pioneer
component
PRE OUT
AUDIO
ANTENNA
LR
PHONO
FRONT
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
CENTER
L
SUB W.
CD
IN
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
OUT
(
)
Single
CD-R/
LR
TAPE/
MD
IN
R
L
LLRR
SPEAKERS
FRONT
A
IN
RL
CENTER
SUB W.
SUR-
iPod
ROUND
SURROUND BACK
RS-232C
1
2
MULTI CH IN
12 V TRIGGER
R L
(
DC OUT 12V/
)
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
FRONT
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
IN
(TV/
IN
(BD)
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
(
CD-R
IN
(
DVD/
LD
IN
COAXIAL
IR
IN
CONTROL
INOUT
1
)
SAT
2
3
)
4
)
4
1
ASSIGNABLE
1
2
1
)
(CD)
2
ASSIGNABLE
41
DIGITAL
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
IN
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
IN
P
B
PR
4
IN
2
IN
Y
(BD)
P
B
OUT
PR
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
IR receiver
2Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE IR OUT
ja ck on the r ear of t his
receiver to link it to the IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for
the type of cable necessary for the connection.
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 81 to connect to the
CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.
Switching components on and off using
the 12 volt trigger
You can connect components in your system (such as a
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input
function. However, you must specify which input
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup menu on page 66. Note that this will only work with
components that have a standby mode.
12V
TRIGGER
•Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to
the 12 V trigger of another component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA.
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on
page 66.
Using this receiver with a Pioneer
plasma display
If you have a Pioneer plasma display, you can use an
SR+ cable
of various convenient features, such as automatic video
input switching of the plasma display when the input is
changed.
1
to connect it to this unit and take advantage
2
CONTROL
OUT
Pioneer plasma
display
MULTI-ZONE
OPTICAL
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN
(TV/
SAT
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
(CD)
)
)
)
1
1
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
IN
IR
1
MAIN
OUT
IN
2
ZONE2
HDMI
1
IN
(
)
1
DVD/LD
CONTROL
IN
(BD)
2
IN
IN
ASSIGNABLE
21
OUT
2
IN
1
OUT
IN
Y
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
IN
B
B
P
P
R
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
P
R
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
(
VIDEO/GAME
P
P
R
3
IN
Y
B
P
P
R
1)
31
4
2
IN
OUT
41
FM UNBAL 75 Ω
ZONE2
MONITOR
OUT
S-VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONITOR
OUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEOA
AM LOO
Z
R
OUT
DVD/LD
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO /
GAME 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
R
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
RL
VIDEOAUDIO
SURROUND BACK
1
12 V TRIGGER
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
LR
RS-232C
2
MULTI CH IN
)
Note
1 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for
more information on obtaining an SR+ cable (you can also use a commercially available 3-ringed mini phone plug for the connection).
2 This receiver is compatible with all SR+ equipped Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward.
61
En
Page 62
09
Other connections
Important
• You can’t use the SR+ features when HDMI Control
is set to ON. Make sure to set HDMI Control to OFF
when you use the SR+ features (page 65).
• If you connect to a Pioneer plasma display using an
SR+ cable, you will need to point the remote control
at the plasma display remote sensor to control the
receiver. In this case, you won’t be able to control the
receiver using the remote control if you switch the
plasma display off.
• Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need
to make a few settings in the receiver. See The Input
Setup menu on page 66 and SR+ Setup for Pioneer
plasma displays on page 68 for detailed instructions.
•Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the
CONTROL IN
OUT
jack of your plasma display.
DVD player
jack of this receiver with the
VIDEO
INPUT 1
Pioneer plasma
display
Satellite receiver, etc
DVD/LD
AUDIO IN
STANDBY/ON
PHASE
ADVANCED
DIGITAL PRECISION
CONTROL
MCACC
PROCESSING
PHASE
AUTO SURR/
MCACC
CONTROL
STREAM DIRECT
INPUT
SELECTOR
POSITION
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER HDMI
HOME
THX
CONTROL
VIDEO
INPUT 2
SAT
AUDIO IN
VSX-LX70
STANDARD
ADVANCED
SURROUND
SURROUND
MASTER
VOLUME
This receiver
To make the most of the SR+ features, you should
connect your source components (DVD player, etc.) in a
slightly different way to that described in this chapter. For
each component, connect the video output directly to the
plasma display, and just connect the audio (analog and/
or digital) to this receiver.
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer
plasma display
When connected using an SR+ cable, a number of
features become available to make using this receiver
with your Pioneer plasma display even easier. These
features include:
• On-screen displays when making receiver settings,
such as speaker setup, MCACC setup, and so on.
• On-screen volume display.
• On-screen display of listening mode.
• Automatic video input switching on the plasma
display.
• Automatic volume muting on the plasma display.
See also SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays on
page 68 for more on setting up the receiver.
Important
• The SR+ features do not work when any of the iPod,
HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60) function is selected.
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
PTY SEARCH
SLEEP
+
SR
CLEAR
+
10
TUNE
STST
TUNE
GUIDE
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVDTV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
1Make sure that the plasma display and this receiver
are switched on and that they are connected with the
SR+ cable.
See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display
above for more on connecting these components.
• Make sure you have also selected the display input to
which you’ve connected the receiver in The Input Setup menu on page 66.
2To switch SR+ mode on/off, press
the SR+ button.
The front panel display shows SR+ ON or SR+ OFF.
• The automatic video input switching and the
automatic volume muting features are enabled
separately; see SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays
on page 68.
DIMMER
GENRE
CLASS
CH
ENTER
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
ENTER
RECEIVER
RETURNRETURN
ANALOG
ATT
DISC
, then
62
En
Page 63
Other connections
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC
output
When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
(see page 45) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of
your listening room, you can graphically check the
results on your computer connected to this receiver.
Also, when the Full Band Phase Control function is
activated, you can visually check the calibrated
characteristics of group delay of the speakers and the
corrected characteristics of group delay processed by the
exclusive correction filter by installing the corresponding
PC application on your computer.
Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect
the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C
jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be
cross type, female-female).
The software to output the results is available from the
support area of the Pioneer website (www.pioneereur.com/files/support/MCACC/software.html).
Instructions for using the software are also available
here. If you have any questions about the sofrware,
please contact the Pioneer Service Center specified on
your warranty card.
Please make sure your system meets the following
requirements:
• Operating system must be Windows
Windows
®
XP, Windows® 2000, Windows®
Millennium Edition, Windows
Windows
®
NT 4.0 (Service pack 6).
• CPU must be at least Pentium 3 / 300 MHz or AMD
K6 / 300 MHz (or equivalent) with at least 128 MB of
memory, and your monitor must be able to display a
minimum resolution of 800x600.
• An RS-232C port connector is necessary for graphical
output. Refer to the operating instructions and/or the
PC manufacturer for more information on making
the proper port settings.
• System must have internet access.
•Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on
the rear panel of the receiver.
Make sure that the receiver and all connected
components are switched off and disconnected from the
power outlet when you do this.
1
®
Vista,
®
98 Second Edition, or
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on
this receiver. See the documentation provided with the
Advanced MCACC application for more information.
RS-232C
Personal computer
Advanced MCACC output using your PC
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 1
in Data Management on page 48. Note that transmission
data is erased when the receiver is turned off.
1Select ‘Output PC’ and press
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the
MCACC application on your PC shows on the OSD.
DVD/LD
5. Data Management
a. MCACC Data Check
b. Memory Rename
c. MCACC Memory Copy
d. MCACC Memory Clear
e. Output PC
-
55.0
:Return
2Start the MCACC application on your computer.
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on
your computer. Since the data will be cleared from the
receiver when you restart reverb measurement or turn off
the receiver, you might want to save the information on
your PC after measurement.
3When you’re finished, press
You will return to the Data Management menu. Continue
with other settings in the Data Management menu if
necessary. Press RETURN again to exit the Data
Management menu.
ENTER
dB
DVD/LD
5e. Output PC
Start the MCACC
application on your PC.
RETURN
.
:Cancel
.
-
55.0
dB
09
Note
1 Make sure that you do this before continuing to the Reverb Measurement option in Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 46 (measurement
data is cleared if you switch off the power).
63
En
Page 64
10
C
A
E
HDMI Control
Chapter 10:
HDMI Control
By connecting this receiver to an HDMI Controlcompatible Pioneer plasma display or the HDD/DVD
recorder with an HDMI cable, you can control this
receiver from the remote control of a connected plasma
display, as well as have the connected plasma display
automatically change inputs in response to operations
carried out on this unit.
Refer to the operating manual for your plasma display for
more information about which operations can be carried
out by connecting via HDMI cable.
• You cannot use this function with components that
do not support HDMI Control.
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI
Control-compatible components other than those
made by Pioneer.
Making the HDMI Control connections
You can use synchronized operation for a connected
plasma display and up to four other components
(including a maximum of two recorders or players).
Be sure to connect the plasma display’s audio cable to
the audio input of this unit.
Important
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch the power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cords to the wall socket.
• After connecting this receiver to an AC outlet, a 15
second initialization process begins. You cannot
carry out any operations during initialization. The
HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during
initialization, and you can turn this receiver on once
it has stopped blinking.
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend
that you connect your HDMI component not to a
plasma display but rather directly to the HDMI
terminal on this receiver.
HDMI Control-compatible
HDD/DVD Recorder
HDMI OUT
MULTI-ZONE
OPTICAL
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
1
IN
(TV/
SAT
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
)
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
)
)
)
1
1
(CD)
4
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL
HDMI
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
41
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
1
CONTROL
IN
OUT
2
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
3
B
P
PR
4
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
1
IN
2
IN
(
VIDEO/GAME
(
DVD/LD
(BD)
ASSIGNABLE
FM UNBAL 75Ω
IR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
)
21
OUT
Y
B
P
PR
3
IN
Y
B
P
PR
1)
31
S-VIDEO
DIGITAL OUT
HDMI IN
HDMI Control-compatible
Pioneer plasma display
MULTI-ZONE & SOURCE
MONI-
TOROUT
1
IN
2
IN
VIDEOAUDIO
DVD/LD
VIDEO /
GAME 1
AM LOOP
R
OUT
IN
BD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 1
IN
OUT
DVR/
VCR 2
IN
VSX-LX70
AUDIO
ANTENNA
PHONO
IN
ZONE2ZONE2
L
CD
IN
OUT
CD-R/
TAPE/
MD
IN
R
R
SUB W.
SURROUND
R
SURROUND B
1
RL
(
DC OUT 12V/
TOTAL 50 mA MAX
AUDIORL
AV OUT
12 V TRIGG
)
64
En
Page 65
HDMI Control
Setting the HDMI options
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as
HDMI Control-compatible connected components in
order to make use of the HDMI Control function. For
more information see the operating instructions for each
component.
10
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is
connected to this receiver, and see if video output
from connected components displays properly on
the screen on not.
4 Check whether the components connected to all
HDMI inputs are properly displayed.
Setting the HDMI Control mode
Choose whether to set this unit’s HDMI Control function
ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the HDMI
Control function.
• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put
this setting to OFF.
1Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
the SETUP button.
2Select ‘Other Setup’ then press ENTER.
3Select ‘HDMI Control Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup
c. SR+ Setup
d. HDMI Control Setup
e. OSD Adjustment
4Select the ‘
-
55.0
dB
:Return
HDMI Control
DVD/LD
8d. HDMI Control Setup
HDMI Control OFF
’ setting you want.
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
• ON – Enables the HDMI Control function. When this
unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported
source begin playback while using the HDMI Control
function, the audio and video output from the HDMI
connection are output from the plasma display.
1
• OFF – The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized
operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is
turned off, audio and video of sources connected via
HDMI are not output.
5When you’re finished, press SETUP.
You will finish to System Setup menu.
Before using synchronization
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you
must:
1 Put all components into standby mode.
2 Turn the power ON for all components, with the
power for the plasma display being turned on last.
Synchronized amp mode
Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an
operation for the plasma display. For more information,
see the operating manual of your plasma display.
Synchronized amp mode operations
By connecting a component to this receiver with an
HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which
allows you to synchronize the following operations:
• Displays on the plasma display when you mute or
adjust the volume of this receiver.
• The input of this receiver is automatically changed
when playback occurs on a connected component.
• Even if you change this receiver’s input to a device
that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized
amp mode remains in effect.
• By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from
a HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate listening
mode is automatically selected (see Using the genre synchronizing function on page 33 for more on this).
Canceling synchronized amp mode
If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected
via HDMI to a plasma display or while you are watching a
TV programme, the power for this unit is turned off.
About HDMI Control
• Connect the plasma display directly to this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause
operational errors.
• Only connect components you intend to use as a
source to the HDMI input of this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause
operational errors.
Note
1• When HDMI Control is set to ON, the audio/video signals input at the HDMI IN terminals are output at the HDMI OUT terminal even when this receiver
is switched off.
• With HDMI Control set to ON, Input Setup and HDMI Input are automatically set to OFF.
65
En
Page 66
11
66
En
Other Settings
Chapter 11:
Other Settings
4Select the input function that you want to set up.
The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to
the default settings (see Input function default and possible settings below). In this case, you need to tell the
receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal
so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the
components you’ve connected.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVDTV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
HOME MEDIA
HDMI
BD TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
GALLERY
TUNER
RECEIVER
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PTY SEARCH
TV VOL
PROGRAM
GUIDE
1Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.
2Press
the
SETUP
RECEIVER
button.
on the remote control, then press
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the
/// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
3Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
Note
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 71),
you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
2 You will have to make an SR+ cable connection from a CONTROL OUT jack on the display to the CONTROL IN jack on this receiver (opposite from the
setup in Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 61). Note that to control this receiver using the remote, you will have to point it at the
plasma display’s remote sensor after making this connection.
-
55.0
:Exit
dB
DVD/LD
7. Input Setup (1/2)
Input DVD
Digital In [ COAX-1 ]
HDMI Input [ Input-1 ]
Component In [ Comp-3 ]
S-Video In [ Input-1 ]
CLEAR
+
10
TUNE
STST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
( Next )
CH
LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
-
55.0
:Finish
DISC
dB
The default names correspond with the names next to the
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD/LD or VIDEO/GAME 1) which, in turn, correspond with the names on
the remote control.
( Next )
-
:Finish
DVD/LD
7. Input Setup (1/2)
Input DVD
Digital In [ COAX-1 ]
HDMI Input [ Input-1 ]
Component In [ Comp-3 ]
S-Video In [ Input-1 ]
DVD/LD
55.0
dB
7. Input Setup (2/2)
Input Name Rename
12V Trigger1 [ OFF ]
12V Trigger2 [ OFF ]
PDP In (SR+) [ OFF ]
ENTER : Next
( Back)
DVD/LD
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
5Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your
component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical
output, you will need to change the DVD/LD input
function’s Digital In setting from COAX 1 (default) to the
optical input you’ve connected it to. The numbering
(OPT1 to 4) corresponds with the numbers beside the
inputs on the back of the receiver.
• If you change the setting to an input that has been
previously assigned to another function (for example,
TV) then the setting for that function will
automatically be switched off.
• If your component is connected via a component
video cable to an input terminal other than the
default, you must tell the receiver which input
terminal your component is connected to, or else you
may see the S-video or composite video signals
instead of the component video signals.
1
6When you’re finished, select ‘Next’ to continue to
the next screen.
The second screen of the Input setup has three optional
settings:
• Input Name – You can choose to rename the input
function for easier identification. Select Rename to
do so, or Default to return to the system default.
• 12V Trigger 1 / 2 – After connecting a component to
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 61), select
MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding
trigger setting to switch it on automatically along
with the (main or sub) zone specified.
• PDP In (SR+) – To control certain functions on this
receiver from a plasma display, select the display
input to which you’ve connected the receiver.
2
Page 67
Other Settings
11
7When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Input function default and possible settings
The terminals on the rear of the receiver generally
correspond to the name of one of the input source
functions. If you have connected components to this
receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults
below, see The Input Setup menu above to tell the receiver
how you’ve connected up. The dots () indicate possible
assignments.
Input
source
DVD/LD
BDOPT 2
TV/SATOPT 1
DVR/VCR 1OPT 3
DVR/VCR 2
VIDEO/
GAME 1
VIDEO/
GAME 2
HDMI 1
HDMI 2(
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
(VSX-LX70)
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
(VSX-LX70)
USB
(VSX-LX60)
CD
CD-R/TAPE/
MD
TUNER
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
iPod
a.With HDMI Control set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see HDMI
Control on page 64).
Digital
COAX 1
(Fixed)
COAX 2
OPT 4
Input Terminals
HDMI
(
HDMI-1
HDMI-2
(
HDMI-3
(
HDMI-4
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
Component
)
)
)
)
S-Video
IN 1IN 1
IN 2IN 2
(Fixed)
(Fixed)
IN 3
(Fixed)
The Other Setup menu
The Other Setup menu is where you can make
customized settings to reflect how you are using the
receiver.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVDTV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
HOME MEDIA
HDMI
BD TV CTRL
ZONE2/3
GALLERY
TUNER
RECEIVER
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PTY SEARCH
TV VOL
PROGRAM
GUIDE
1Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.
2Press
the
SETUP
RECEIVER
button.
on the remote control, then press
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the
/// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
3Select ‘Other Setup’ then press
DVD/LD
System Setup MENU
1. Auto MCACC
2. Surr Back System
3. Manual MCACC
4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL
5. Data Management
6. Manual SP Setup
7. Input Setup
8. Other Setup
-
:Exit
55.0
dB
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup
c. SR+ Setup
d. HDMI Control Setup
e. OSD Adjustment
4Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
• Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings
for a multi-channel input.
• ZONE Audio Setup – Specify your volume setting for
a MULTI-ZONE setup (see ZONE Audio Setup below).
• SR+ Setup – Specify how you want to control your
Pioneer plasma display (see SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays below).
• HDMI Control Setup – Synchronizes this receiver
with your Pioneer component supporting HDMI
Control (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on
page 65).
• OSD Adjustment – Adjust the position of the on-
screen display on your TV (see OSD Adjustment
below).
5Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
CLEAR
+
10
TUNE
STST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
ENTER
CH
LEVEL
CLASS
DISC
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
.
-
55.0
:Return
dB
67
En
Page 68
11
Other Settings
Multi Channel Input Setup
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multichannel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is
selected as an input source, you can display the video
images of other input sources. In the Multi Channel Input
Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-channel
input.
1Select ‘
Multi Ch In Setup
’ from the Other Setup
menu.
2Select the ‘
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup
c. SR+ Setup
d. HDMI Control Setup
e. OSD Adjustment
SW Input Gain
-
55.0
dB
:Return
’ setting you want.
• 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
originally recorded on the source.
• +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
increased by 10 dB.
3Select the ‘
DVD/LD
8a. Multi Ch In Setup
SW Input Gain 0dB
Video Input [ DVD ]
Video Input
-
55.0
dB
:Finish
’ setting you want.
When the multi-channel input is selected as an input
source, you can display the video images of other input
sources. The video input can be selected from the
following: DVD/LD, BD, TV/SAT, DVR/VCR1, DVR/VCR2, VIDEO/GAME1, VIDEO/GAME2.
DVD/LD
8a. Multi Ch In Setup
SW Input Gain [ 0dB ]
Video Input BD
4When you’re finished, press
-
55.0
dB
:Finish
RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
ZONE Audio Setup
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTIZONE listening on page 58) you may need to specify your
volume setting.
1 Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup
c. SR+ Setup
d. HDMI Control Setup
e. OSD Adjustment
-
55.0
:Return
DVD/LD
dB
8b. ZONE Audio Setup
ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting
RECSEL
ZONE 2 Volume Level
[ Variable ]
-
55.0
:Finish
dB
2 Select the ‘ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting’ you want.
You can select the ZONE 2 or RECSEL setting.
• ZONE 2 – Sound is output from MULTI ZONE &
SOURCE ZONE2 OUT jack.
• RECSEL – Sound is output from the CD-R/TAPE OUT,
DVR/VCR1 OUT or DVR/VCR2 OUT jack. For details,
see Playing a different source when recording on
page 72.
3 Select the volume level setting.
1
• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.
• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that
receiver’s volume controls. (This setting is not
available if the surround back system setting is set to
ZONE 2.)
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is
quite low in the sub zone at first and then experiment to
find the correct level.
4When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays
Make the following settings if you have connected a
Pioneer plasma display to this receiver using an SR+
cable. Note that the number of function settings available
will depend on the plasma display you’ve connected.
See also Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display
on page 61 and Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma display on page 62.
1Select ‘SR+ Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup
c. SR+ Setup
d. HDMI Control Setup
e. OSD Adjustment
DVD/LD
-
55.0
dB
8c. SR+ Setup
PDP Volume Control
OFF
Monitor Out Connect
[ OFF ]
-
55.0
dB
68
En
:Return
Note
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 42, you won’t be able to change the volume level.
:Finish
Page 69
Other Settings
11
2Select the ‘
PDP Volume Control
’ setting you want.
• OFF – The receiver does not control the volume of the
plasma display.
• ON – When the receiver is switched to one of the
inputs that use the plasma display (DVD/LD, for
example), the volume on the plasma display is muted
so only sound from the receiver is heard.
3Assign any input source connected to the plasma
display to the corresponding input number.
This matches the receiver’s input source with a
numbered video input on the plasma display. For
example, assign DVD/LD to input-2 if you have
connected the your DVD video output to video input 2 on
the plasma display.
•The Monitor Out Connect should be set to the input
that you’ve used to connect this receiver to your
plasma display.
DVD/LD
8c. SR+ Setup
PDP Volume Control
[ OFF ]
Monitor Out Connect
OFF
4When you’re finished, press
-
55.0
dB
:Finish
RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
OSD Adjustment
Use this feature to adjust your TV display if it seems
difficult to see all the instructions on the screen.
1 Select ‘OSD Adjustment’ from the Other Setup
menu.
DVD/LD
8. Other Setup
a. Multi Ch In Setup
b. ZONE Audio Setup
c. SR+ Setup
d. HDMI Control Setup
e. OSD Adjustment
AA
-
55.0
dB
X=0 , Y=0
[ Finish ]
:Return
A
:Cancel
A
2Use /// to move the display field around
until you get one that you feel best suits your TV.
3When you’re finished, press
ENTER
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
69
En
Page 70
12
Using other functions
Chapter 12:
Using other functions
SettingWhat it doesOption(s)
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can
make using the Audio Parameter menu. The defaults, if
not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Audio
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, settings and status of the receiver.
1Press
2Use
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
3Use
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.
4Press
SettingWhat it doesOption(s)
MCACC
(MCACC
preset)
EQ
(Acoustic
Calibration
EQ)
S-WAVE
(Standing
Wave)
DELAY
(Sound
Delay)
MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble
A PARAMETER (AUDIO PARAMETER
/
to select the setting you want to adjust.
/
to set it as necessary.
RETURN
to confirm and exit the menu.
Selects your favorite MCACC preset
memory when multiple preset
memories are saved. When a
MCACC preset memory has been
renamed, the name given is
displayed.
Switches on/off the effects of EQ
Pro. only for the MCACC preset
memory selected. This setting is
available for each MCACC preset
memory.
Switches on/off the effects of
Standing Wave Control only for the
MCACC preset memory selected.
This setting is available for each
MCACC preset memory.
Some monitors have a slight delay
when showing video, so the
soundtrack will be slightly out of sync
with the picture. By adding a bit of
delay, you can adjust the sound to
match the presentation of the video.
surround sound of movies at low
volumes.
from music sources at low volumes.
M1. MEMORY 1
M6. MEMORY 6
M1. MEMORY 1
1 second = 25
MID/LDN OFF
MIDNIGHT ON
LOUDNESS ON
).
to
Default:
MCACC OFF
ON
b
OFF
ON
OFF
0.0 to 6.0
(frames)
frames (PAL)
Default: 0.0
a
TONE
(Tone Control)
c
BASS
c
TREBLE
S.RTRV
(Sound
Retriever)
DNR
(Digital Noise
Reduction)
DIALOG E
(Dialog
Enhancement)
HIBITSMP
(High Bit /
High
Sampling)
DUAL
(Dual Mono)
DRC
(Dynamic
Range
Control)
Applies the treble and bass tone
controls to a source, or bypasses
them completely.
Adjusts the amount of bass.–6 to +6 (dB)
Adjusts the amount of treble.–6 to +6 (dB)
When audio data is removed during
the WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC
compression process, sound quality
often suffers from an uneven sound
image. The Sound Retriever feature
employs new DSP technology that
helps bring CD quality sound back
to compressed 2-channel audio by
restoring sound pressure and
smoothing jagged artifacts left over
after compression.
May improve the quality of sound in
a noisy source (for example,
cassette or video tape with lots of
background noise) when switched
on.
Localizes dialog in the center
channel to make it stand out from
other background sounds in a TV or
movie soundtrack.
Creates a wider dynamic range with
digital sources like CDs or DVDs.
Specifies how dual mono encoded
Dolby Digital soundtracks should be
played. Dual mono is not widely
used, but is sometimes necessary
when two languages need to be sent
to separate channels.
Adjusts the level of dynamic range
for movie soundtracks optimized for
Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and
DTS-HD Master Audio (you may
need to use this feature when
listening to surround sound at low
volumes).
BYPASS
ON
Default: 0 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
CH1 –
Channel 1 is
heard only
CH2 –
Channel 2 is
heard only
–
CH1 CH2
Both channels
heard from front
speakers
d
AUTO
OFF
MAX
MID
70
En
Page 71
Using other functions
12
SettingWhat it doesOption(s)
LFE ATT
(LFE
Attenuate)
SACD
GAIN
HDMI
(HDMI
Audio)
A. DELAY
(Auto delay)
C. WIDTH
(Center
Width)
(Applicable
only when
using a center
speaker)
DIMENSION
PANORAMA
C. IMAGE
(Center
Image)
(Applicable
only when
using a center
speaker)
EFFECTSets the effect level for the currently
Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio
sources include ultra-low bass
tones. Set the LFE attenuator as
necessary to prevent the ultra-low
bass tones from distorting the
sound from the speakers.
The LFE is not limited when set to
0 dB, which is the recommended
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited
by the respective degree. When OFF
is selected, no sound is output from
the LFE channel.
Brings out detail in SACDs by
e
maximizing the dynamic range
(during digital processing).
Specifies the routing of the HDMI
audio signal out of this receiver
(amp) or through to a TV or plasma
display. When THROUGH is
selected, no sound is output from
this receiver.
This feature automatically corrects
the audio-to-video delay between
components connected with an
HDMI cable. The audio delay time is
set depending on the operational
status of the display connected with
an HDMI cable. The video delay time
is automatically adjusted according
to the audio delay time.
g
Provides a better blend of the front
speakers by spreading the center
channel between the front right and
left speakers, making it sound wider
(higher settings) or narrower (lower
settings).
g
Adjusts the depth of the surround
sound balance from front to back,
making the sound more distant
(minus settings), or more forward
(positive settings).
g
Extends the front stereo image to
include the surround speakers for a
‘wraparound’ effect.
h
Adjusts the center image to create a
wider stereo effect with vocals.
Adjust the effect from 0 (all center
channel sent to front right and left
speakers) to 10 (center channel sent
to the center speaker only).
selected Advanced Surround mode
(each mode can be set separately).
f
0dB
–5dB/ –10dB/
–15dB/ –20dB/
OFF
0 to 6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
AMP
THROUGH
OFF
ON
0 to 7
Default: 3
–3 to +3
Default: 0
OFF
ON
0 to 10
Default: 3
10 to 90
a.When MCACCOFF is selected, all MCACC preset memories become
deactivated.
b.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light even
when a MCACC preset memory is selected.
c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
d.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select
MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.
e.You shouldn’t have any problems usin g this with most SACD discs, but
if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB.
f. This feature is only available when the connected display supports the
automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lip-sync’) for HDMI or
HDMI Control. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set
A. DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more details
about the lip-sync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer
directly.
g.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/
Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
h.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode.
Setting the Video options
There are a number of additional picture settings you can
make using the Video Parameter menu. The defaults, if
not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Video
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, setting and status of the receiver.
1Press
2Use
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
3Use
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.
4Press
SettingWhat it doesOption(s)
V. CONV
(Digital Video
Conversion)
BRIGHT
(Brightness)
CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast between light
HUEAdjusts the red/green balance.–10 to +10
CHROMAAdjusts saturation from dull to
V PARAMETER (VIDEO PARAMETER
/
to select the setting you want to adjust.
/
to set it as necessary.
1
RETURN
to confirm and exit the menu.
Converts video signals for output
from the MONITOR OUT jacks for
all video types.
Adjusts the overall brightness.–10 to +10
and dark.
bright.
).
ON
OFF
Default: 0
–10 to +10
Default: 0
Default: 0
–10 to +10
Default: 0
Note
1 Brightness, Contrast, Hue, Chroma, Resolution and Aspect can be set for each input source.
71
En
Page 72
12
Using other functions
SettingWhat it doesOption(s)
a
RES
(Resolution)
ASP
(Aspect)
a.When a resolution value is selected in this setting and the analog signals
input are converted and output as HDMI signals, images may not appear
depending on the video signals being input or the resolution of your
monitor. Also, depending on the source component or the monitor being
used, the output resolution may be different from this setting. Conversion
to 1080p is available only for the input signals of 480i/576i/480p/576p.
Specifies the output resolution of
the video signal (when analog video
input signals are output at the HDMI
OUT connector, select this
according to the resolution of your
monitor and the images you wish to
watch). When AUTO is selected, the
resolution is automatically selected
depending on the capability of the
display connected to this receiver.
Specifies the aspect ratio when
analog video input signals are
output at the HDMI output. Make
your desired settings while checking
each setting on your display (if the
image doesn’t match your monitor
type, cropping or black bands
appear).
AUTO
PURE
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
THROUGH
(none)
NORMAL
ZOOM
Making an audio or a video recording
You can make an audio or a video recording from the
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).
To use this feature, you must set ZONE2/RECSEL to
RECSEL in the ZONE Audio Setup. For details, see ZONE
Audio Setup on page 68.
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on
page 12 for more on connections).
Since the video converter is not available when making
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder
as you used to connect your video source (the one you
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must
connect your recorder using S-video if your source has
also been connected using S-video.
1
For more information about video connections, see
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video
sources on page 16.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
HOME MEDIA
1Select the source you want to record.
Use the input source buttons (or INPUT SELECT).
• If necessary, press SIGNAL SELECT to select the
input signal corresponding to the source component
(see Choosing the input signal on page 31 for more
on this).
2Prepare the source you want to record.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.
3Prepare the recorder.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording
device and set the recording levels.
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set
the audio recording level automatically—check the
component's instruction manual if you’re unsure.
4Start recording, then start playback of the source
component.
Tip
• If you have a digital recorder connected to the
DIGITAL OUT1 ( ZONE3) digital output and ZONE 3 is
switched on (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on
page 60), you can also select a different input source
for this output while ZONE 3 shows in the display.
Playing a different source when recording
Using this receiver, it’s possible to listen to a different
analog source than the one you’re recording.
AUDIOVIDEO
PHONES
PARAMETER
(TUNE)
(ST)(ST)
ENTER
(TUNE)
SETUP
RETURN
TUNER EDITSPEAKERSBAND
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
MULTI – ZONE &
SOURCE/REC SEL
CONTROL ON/OFF
SIGNAL
SB ch
SELECT
PROCESSING
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO LRAUDIO
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
72
En
Note
1 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.
Page 73
Using other functions
12
1During recording, press the
button on the front panel until
1
display.
REC SELECT CONTROL
RECOUT
shows in the
2 While RECOUT shows in the display, use the
INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source you want
to record.
The default, RECOUT SOURCE, records the source you’re
currently listening to (as in Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu. above).
• Note that the setting you make here is stored in
memory, even if you switch off the receiver, so if you
want to record a different input source later, you
must do so with REC SELECT, or by selecting
RECOUT SOURCE.
3After
RECOUT
disappears from the display, select
the input source you want to listen to.
This will be heard from the main system without affecting
your recording.
2
Reducing the level of an analog signal
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find
the that the OVER indicator is lights often, or you can
hear distortion in the sound.
•Press
ANALOG ATT
on or off.
3
D.ACCESS
SLEEP
+
SR
DIMMER
GENRE
ANALOG
ATT
CLASS
to switch the input attenuator
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will
cycle through the sleep options again.
4
Dimming the display
You can choose between four brightness levels for the
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.
•Press
DIMMER
SLEEP
+
SR
D.ACCESS
repeatedly to change the brightness
DIMMER
GENRE
ANALOG
ATT
CLASS
of the front panel display.
Switching the speaker impedance
We recommend using speakers of 8 Ω with this system,
but it is possible to switch the impedance setting if you
plan to use speakers with a 6 Ω impedance rating.
1With the receiver in standby, press
while holding down the
ON
2Select
using
SPEAKER
/
using
.
SETUP
/
• SPEAKER 6 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 6 Ω.
• SPEAKER 8 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 8 Ω or more.
STANDBY/
button.
, then select
8 Ω
or
6 Ω
Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use
the remote control to set the sleep timer.
SLEEP
+
SR
•Press
SLEEP
repeatedly to set the sleep time.
30 min60 min
Off
Note
1If RECOUT does not appear in the display, you may have to switch ZONE 2 off by pressing MULTI ZONE & SOURCE ON/OFF and selecting either
ZONE 3 or off (the MULTI-ZONE indicator disappears). See Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 60 for more on this.
2If RECOUT SOURCE is selected, changing the input source likewise changes the input source used for your recording.
3 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct modes.
4 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.
DIMMER
GENRE
ANALOG
ATT
90 min
73
En
Page 74
12
Using other functions
Checking your system settings
Use the status display screen to check your current
settings for features such as surround back channel
processing and your current MCACC preset.
AUDIO SUBTITLE
HDD
DVD
DISP
CH
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
T.DISP
SBch
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
CH
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
1
PHOTO
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1Press
STATUS
to check the system settings.
These appear on the front panel display.
The front panel display shows each of the following
settings for two seconds each:
Input source
Surround Back Processing
2When you’re finished, press
↓
↓
MCACC preset
↓
ZONE 2 / REC SEL
↓
ZONE 3
↓
HDMI Control
STATUS
again to
switch off the display.
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.
1Switch the receiver into standby.
2While holding down the
panel, press
STANDBY/ON
The display shows RESET NO.
3Press the
4Select
ENTER
RESET
button on the front panel.
using
button on the front panel.
The display shows RESET? OK.
5Press
ENTER
to confirm.
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver
has been reset to the factory default settings.
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the
receiver is unplugged.
SETUP
.
/
, then press the
button on the front
ENTER
Default system settings
SettingDefault
HDMI AudioAmp
Digital Video ConversionOn
SpeakersA
Surround Back SystemNormal (default)
Speaker SystemFrontSMALL
CenterSMALL
Surr.SMALL
SBSMALLx2
SWYES
Crossover80 Hz
X-CurveOFF
THX Audio Setting0–0.3m
Inputs
See Input function default and possible settings on page 67.
MULTI-ZONE
Zone 2 Volume TypeVariable
Zone 2 Volume–60
SR+
SR+ Control On/OffOFF
SR+ Volume Control On/OffOFF
Monitor OutOFF
DSP
MCACC Position MemoryM1: MEMORY 1
Surround back channel
Processing
Phase ControlON
Full Band Phase ControlOFF
Sound RetrieverOFF
Sound Delay0 frame
Dual MonoCH1
DRCAUTO
SACD Gain0 dB
LFE Attenuate0 dB
Auto delayOFF
Digital SafetyOFF
ON
74
En
Note
1 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.
Page 75
Using other functions
SettingDefault
Effect LevelExtendedStereo90
Other modes50
2 PL II Music Options Center Width3
Dimension0
PanoramaOFF
Neo:6 OptionsCenter Image3
All InputsListening Mode (2 ch) AUTO SURROUND
Listening Mode (x ch) AUTO SURROUND
Listening Mode (HP)STEREO
See also Setting the Audio options on page 70 for other default DSP
settings.
MCACC
Channel level (M1–M6)0 dB
Speaker Distance (M1–M6)3.00 m
Standing Wave
(M1–M6)
EQ Data (M1–M6)All channels/bands0 dB
EQ Wide Trim (M1–M6)0.0 dB
Standing Wave On/
Off
ATT0 dB
SWch Wide Trim0.0
ON
12
75
En
Page 76
13
Controlling the rest of your system
Chapter 13:
Controlling the rest of your system
4Use
/
to select the first letter of the brand name
ENTER
Setting the remote to control other
components
Most components can be assigned to one of the input
source buttons (such as DVD/LD or CD) using the
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the
remote.
However, there are cases where only certain functions
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote
control will not work for the model that you are using.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the
component you want to control, you can still teach the
remote individual commands from another remote
control (see Programming signals from other remote controls below).
Note
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing
RECEIVER. To go back a step, press RETURN.
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote
automatically exits the operation.
of your component then press
This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P
for Pioneer).
5Use
the list then press
6Use
/
to select the manufacturer’s name from
ENTER
.
/
to select the proper code from the list,
then try using this remote with your component.
The code should start with the component type (for
example, DVD 020). If there is more than one, start with
the first one.
2
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there
is one).
• If you can’t find or properly enter a preset code, you
can still teach the remote individual commands from
another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls below).
7If your component is controlled successfully, press
ENTER
to confirm.
The remote LCD display shows OK.
.
76
En
Selecting preset codes directly
Programming signals from other
remote controls
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
DVDTV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
1While pressing the
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
GUIDE
PTY SEARCH
TV VOL
button, press
CLEAR
+
10
TUNE
STST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
CH
LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
DISC
SETUP
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2Use
/
to select
PRESET
then press
ENTER
.
3Press the input source button for the component
you want to control then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote displays the component you want
to control (for example DVD or TV).
Note
1 You can’t assign the RECEIVER, TUNER, iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) buttons.
2 • When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please select PIONEER DVR487, 488, 489 or 493.
• When using a Pioneer plasma display released prior to summer 2005, please select preset codes 637 or 660.
3 The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).
4 • You can’t assign the RECEIVER, TUNER, iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY (VSX-LX70 only) or USB (VSX-LX60 only) buttons.
• TV CONTROL buttons (TV, TV VOL +/–, TV CH +/– and INPUT SELECT) can only be learned after selecting TV CTRL.
1
If the preset code for your component is not available, or
the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you
can program signals from the remote control of another
component. This can also be used to program additional
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after
assigning a preset code.
1While pressing the
3
RECEIVER
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
.
2Use
/
to select
LEARNING
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component
you want to control (for example DVD or TV).
3Press the input source button for the component
you want to control then press
PRES KEY shows in the LCD display.
button, press
then press
ENTER
.
4
SETUP
ENTER
.
.
Page 77
Controlling the rest of your system
CLEAR
PTYSEARCH
13
4Point the two remote controls towards each other
then press the button that will be doing the learning on
7Press and hold the
RECEIVER
button for a couple of
seconds to exit and store the operation(s).
this receiver’s remote control.
PRES KEY starts flashing to indicate the remote is ready
to accept a signal.
• The remote controls should be 3 cm to 5 cm apart.
ANALOG
ATT
DISC
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
3 cm to 5 cm
CLASS
SYSTEM OFF
BD TV CTRL
GENRE
DIMMER
TUNER
CD-R
GALLERY
INPUT
+
SELECT
HOME MEDIA
SLEEP
SR
CD
D.ACCESS
DVD TV
DVR2
DVR1 i Pod
RECEIVER SOURCE
5Press the corresponding button on the other
remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to
this receiver’s remote control.
For example, if you want to learn the playback control
signal, press and hold briefly. The LCD display will
show OK if the operation has been learned.
1
If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the
LCD will display ERROR briefly and then display PRES KEY again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching)
button as you vary the distance between the two remotes,
until the LCD display shows OK.
2
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be
learned from other remote controls.
3
The buttons
available are shown below (with the exception of the TV
controls, a combination of SHIFT and these buttons can
also be learned):
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
Erasing one of the remote control
button settings
This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and
restores the button to the factory default.
1While pressing the
RECEIVER
button, press
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2Use
/
to select
ERASE
then press
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component
corresponding to the button setting to be erased.
3Press the input source button corresponding to the
command to be erased then press
ENTER
The LCD display flashes PRES KEY.
4Press and hold the button to be erased for two
seconds.
The LCD display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the
button has been erased.
5Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.
6Press and hold the
RECEIVER
button for a couple of
seconds when you’re done.
Resetting the remote control presets
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and
programmed buttons.
CD
DVDTV
DVR2
DVR1
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUP
PTY SEARCH
CD-R
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
i Pod
SLEEP
+
SR
CLEAR
+
10
TUNE
STST
PROGRAM
GUIDE
TV CONTROL
TUNE
ENTER
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
DIMMER
GENRE
CH
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
CLASS
ENTER
HDMI
RETURN
ANALOG
ATT
DISC
1While pressing the
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2Use
/
to select
RESET flashes in the LCD display.
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
TV VOL
TV/DTV
A
MPX
BCDE
AUDIO SUBTITLE
PHOTO
STATUS
SIGNAL SEL
SELECT
EON
VOL
INFO
REC
MUTE
REC STOP
JUKEBOX
HDD
DVD
DISP
CH
CH
T.DISP
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
3Press and hold
The LCD shows OK to confirm the remote presets have
been erased.
Confirming preset codes
Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned
RECEIVER
RESET
button, press
then press
ENTER for about two seconds
to an input source button.
6To program additional signals for the current
component repeat steps 4 and 5.
To program signals for another component, exit and
repeat steps 1 through 5.
1While pressing the
RECEIVER
button, press
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2Use
/
to select READ ID then press
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the input source
button you want to check.
Note
1 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.
2 • Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.
• If the remote LCD shows FULL, it means the memory is full. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings below to erase a programmed button
you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).
3 Note that the number key decimal button (+10/D.ACCESS) may not be learned with some components.
ENTER
.
ENTER
ENTER
SETUP
.
SETUP
.
.
SETUP
.
.
.
.
77
En
Page 78
13
Controlling the rest of your system
3Press the button of the component for which you
ENTER
want to check the preset code, then press
.
The brand name and preset code appears in the display
for three seconds.
Renaming input source names
You can customize the names that appear on the remote
LCD when you select an input source (for example, you
could change the name of DVR 1 to HDD/DVR).
1While pressing the
RECEIVER
button, press
SETUP
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2Use
/
to select
RENAME
then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the
input source you want to rename.
3Press the input source button you want to rename
then press
4Use
/
ENTER
to select
.
NAME EDT
then press
ENTER
.
To reset the button to its original (default) name, select
NAME RST above.
5Edit the name of the input source in the remote
control LCD, pressing
ENTER
when you’re finished.
Use / to change the character and / to move
forward/back a position. The name can be up to eight
characters (the possible characters are listed below).
You can use the direct function feature to control one
component using the remote control while at the same
time, using your receiver to playback a different
component. This could let you, for example, use the
remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver
and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your
VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player.
When direct function is on, any component you select
(using the input source buttons) will be selected by both
the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct
function off, you can operate the remote control without
affecting the receiver.
1While pressing the
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
1
RECEIVER
button, press
SETUP
2Use
/
to select
DIRECT F
then press
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the
input source you want to control.
3Press the input source button for the component
you want to control then press
4Use
press
/
to switch direct function ON or
ENTER
.
ENTER
.
The LCD shows OK to confirm the setting.
.
Multi Operation and System Off
The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a
series of up to 5 commands for the components in your
system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on
your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using
only two buttons on the remote control.
Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use
one button to stop and switch off a series of components
in your system at the same time.
2
Programming a multi-operation or a
shutdown sequence
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVDTV
BD TV CTRL
HOME MEDIA
DVR2
GALLERY
DVR1 i Pod
TUNER
1While pressing the
HDMI
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUPSETUP
PROGRAM
GUIDE
PTY SEARCH
TV VOL
button, press
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2Use
menu and press
/
to select
ENTER
MULTI OP
.
or
If you selected Multi Operation (MULTI OP), the LCD on
the remote prompts you for an input source button.
If you selected System Off (SYS OFF), go to step 4.
3Press the input source button for the component
that will start the multi-operation then press
For example, if you want to start the sequence by
switching on your DVD player, press DVD.
4Use
.
To erase any previously stored multi-operations (or
/
to select
CODE EDT
then press
shutdown sequences) select CODE ERS above.
CLEAR
+
10
TUNE
STST
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
SELECT
SYS OFF
CH
LEVEL
CLASS
ENTER
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
RETURNRETURN
VOL
ENTER
OFF
then
DISC
SETUP
from the
ENTER
ENTER
.
.
.
.
78
En
Note
1 You can’t use direct function with the TV CTRL function.
2 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 76 for more on this).
• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.
• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.
Page 79
Controlling the rest of your system
PTYSEARCH
T.DISP
PHOTO
5Use
/
to select a command in the sequence then
ENTER
press
If this is the first command in the sequence, select 1ST
CODE. Otherwise, simply choose the next command in the sequence. PRES KEY flashes after you press ENTER.
6If necessary, press the input source button for the
component whose command you want to input.
This is only necessary if the command is for a new
component (input source).
7Select the button for the command you want to
input.
The following remote control commands can be selected:
• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on
or off. This is done automatically.
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:
• program the power to switch off in a shutdown
sequence (except DVD recorders);
• program the power to switch on if it’s the source
component selected in step 3;
• program a Pioneer TV or monitor to switch on if the
input function (selected in step 2) has video input
terminals;
These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).
8Repeat steps 5–7 to program a sequence of up to
five commands.
9When you’re finished, use
from the menu and press
You will return to the remote control SETUP menu. Select
* EXIT * again to exit.
.
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
i Pod
TUNE
ENTER
TUNE
TV CONTROL
BD TV CTRL
TUNER
DIMMER
GENRE
CH
LEVEL
V PARAMETER
MENU T.EDIT
ZONE2/3
RECEIVER
CLASS
ENTER
HDMI
RETURN
DVDTV
DVR2
DVR1
D.ACCESS
A PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
SETUP
PTY SEARCH
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
SLEEP
+
SR
CLEAR
+
10
STST
PROGRAM
GUIDE
ANALOG
ATT
DISC
ENTER
TV CONTROL
INPUT
TV CH
TV VOL
SELECT
INFO
REC
TV/DTV
A
REC STOP
EON
MPX
BCDE
AUDIO SUBTITLE
HDD
DISP
CH
PHOTO
T.DISP
STATUS
SIGNAL SEL
SBch
/
to select
.
VOL
MUTE
JUKEBOX
DVD
CH
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
EDITEXIT
Using multi operations
You can start multi operations with the receiver switched
on, or in standby.
PHOTO
T.DISP
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
1 Press MULTI OPE.
MULTI OP flashes in the display.
2
Press
an input source button that has been set up
with a multi operation.
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the
programmed multi operation is performed automatically.
Using System off
SYSTEM OFF
INPUT
RECEIVERSOURCE
SELECT
CD
CD-R
DVD TV
HDMI
BD TV CTRL
STATUSSTATUS
MULTI OPE
SHIFT
SIGNAL SEL
THX
PHASE
RECEIVER
STEREO/
SBch
F.S.SURR
ADV. SURR
STANDARD
MCACC S.DIRECT
1 Press MULTI OPE.
MULTI OP flashes in the display.
2Press
SOURCE
.
The command sequence you programmed will run, then
all Pioneer components will switch off
1
, followed by this
receiver.
Controls for TVs
This remote control can control components after
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the
commands (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 76 for more on this). Use the input
source buttons to select the component.
13
Note
1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.
79
En
Page 80
13
Controlling the rest of your system
•The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the
TV CTRL button.
Button(s) FunctionComponents
TVPress to switch the component
INPUT
SELECT
TV CH +/– Selects channels.Cable TV/Satellite
TV VOL +/– Adjust the TV volume.Cable TV/Satellite
SOURCE Switches the TV or CATV between
Use to choose the ‘A’ commands
Use to choose the RED/B
Use to choose the CYAN/E
Use to choose the GREEN/C
Use to choose the YELLOW/D
AUDIOUse to switch audio tracks.Satellite TV/TV
SUBTITLE
(SHIFT+
DISP)
GUIDEUse as the GUIDE button for
DISPUse to display the channel
RETURNUse to select RETURN or EXIT.Satellite TV/TV
Number
buttons
+10 button Use to add a decimal point when
ENTER/
DISC
MENUSelect the menu screen.Cable TV/Satellite
///
& ENTER
TOP MENU Switches TEXT ON for TVs.TV
assigned to the TV CTRL
button on or off.
Switches the TV input. (Not
possible with all models.)
standby and on.
on a Satellite TV menu.
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
Use to return to the previously
selected channel.
navigating.
Switches TEXT OFF for TVs.TV
information.
Use to select a specific TV
channel.
selecting a specific TV channel.
Use to enter a channel.Cable TV/Satellite
Press to select or adjust and
navigate items on the menu
screen.
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
TV/TV
TV/TV
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
Satellite TV
Satellite TV/TV
Satellite TV/TV
Satellite TV/TV
Satellite TV/TV
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
Cable TV/TV
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
Satellite TV/TV
TV/TV
TV/TV
Cable TV/Satellite
TV/TV
Controls for other components
This remote control can control these components after
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the
commands (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 76 for more on this). Use the input
source buttons to select the component.
Button (s) FunctionComponents
SOURCE Press to switch the component
Pause playback or recording.CD/MD/CD-R/
Start playback.CD/MD/CD-R/
Hold down for fast forward
Hold down for fast reverse
Stops playback.CD/MD/CD-R/
REC
(SHIFT+)
REC STOP
(SHIFT+)
JUKEBOX
(SHIFT+)
Number
buttons
+10 button Selects tracks higher than 10. (For
between standby and on.
Press to return to the start of the
current track or chapter.
Repeated presses skips to the start
of previous tracks or chapters.
Press to advance to the start of the
next track or chapter.
Repeated presses skips to the start
of following tracks or chapters.
playback.
playback.
Starts recording. MD/CD-R/DVR
Stops recording.DVR player
Switches to the Jukebox feature.DVR player
Directly access tracks on a
program source.
Use the number buttons to
navigate the on-screen display.
Displays/changes the subtitles on
multilingual DVDs.
Switches to the VCR controls when
using a VCR/DVD/HDD recorder.
DVD/BD/DVR
player
DVD/BD/DVR
player
VCR/DVD/DVR
player
player
Switches to the hard disk controls
DVR player
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
Switches to the DVD controls
DVR player
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks
which can be used to link components together so that
you can use just the remote sensor of one component.
When you use a remote control, the control signal is
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.
Important
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or
HDMI jacks connected to another component for
grounding purposes.
1 Decide which component you want to use the
remote sensor of.
When you want to control any component in the chain,
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the
corresponding remote control.
2Connect the
to the
CONTROL IN
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
MULTI-ZONE
& SOURCE
/REC SEL
OUT1
ZONE3
OUT2
LAN (10/100)
OPTICAL
1
IN
(TV/
2
IN
(BD)
3
IN
(
DVR/
VCR 1
4
IN
(
CD-R
ASSIGNABLE
1
IN
(
DVD/
LD
2
IN
COAXIAL
HDMI
1
IN
)
SAT
2
IN
)
3
IN
)
1
4
1
2
4
IN
)
(CD)
OUT
ASSIGNABLE
41
DIGITAL
CONTROL OUT
jack of that component
jack of another Pioneer component.
MU
& S
IN
1
MAIN
IN
2
ZONE2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
1
IN
Y
(
DVD/
)
LD
B
P
PR
2
IN
Y
(BD)
B
P
PR
ASSIGNABLE
COMPONENT
1
IN
2
IN
(
VIDE
CONTROL
(
(
INOUT
CONTROL
INOUT
F
F
E
O
C
M
E
UR
T
S
O
Y
S
S
T
G
N
3
/
O
O
R
L
2
T
E
C
A
M
T
V
N
I
V
O
A
A
E
T
O
C
R
E
R
2
T
T
C
1
C
U
S
I
EO
O
O
E
I
D
L
E
L
D
D
R
NP
I
E
I
E
S
A
E
ID
U
V
R
S
S
V
O
R
V
N
N
A
N
E
E
M
T
L
R
U
L
I
E
X
DE
T
E
L
R
I
E
T
C
S
N
D
V
U
R
M
M
H
E
E
T
.
E
M
C
I
E
T
V
D
R
V
T
I
T
R
-
D
d
SA
D
CE
T
N
L
C
S
Po
E
A
i
R
B
VO
P
E
E
T
Y
E
R
L
U
D
S
D
+
O
C
M
2
R
R
1
M
L
R
S
E
H
DV
E
R
V
E
T
O
C
O
N
M
D
N
R
E
R
H
DVD
0
U
O
E
DV
R
R
T
T
1
C
F
E
TV
U
+
N
S
N
E
T
S
I
T
R
S
N
OP
S
.
O
C
E
E
U
T
V
E
V
C
C
T
T
T
S
R
D
T
C
E
I
T
T
D
C
S
D
V
A
U
A
D
.
E
C
U
M
.
T
D
N
R
Y
D
E
S
P
A
h
E
R
H
H
D
L
c
R
N
C
R
O
C
E
I
B
M
E
A
U
S
S
PA
D
R
P
N
C
TEG
E
N
E
P
V
O
A
L
A
M
AC
U
T
C
A
T
T
L
C
I
S
T
V
L
E
E
T
T
O
E
M
S
D
V
D
B
I
S
L
V
U
U
A
T
E
S
X
G
N
S
H
G
X
I
A
T
S
P
O
I
M
PH
S
D
P
O
IS
S
U
E
I
TU
D
A
A
OP
I
T
T
T
S
L
F
I
U
H
M
S
13
1
R
VE
I
E
C
E
R
3Continue the chain in the same way for as many
components as you have.
Note
1 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, refer to Setting the remote to control other components on page 76.
If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.
• See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 61 if you are connecting a Pioneer plasma display.
81
En
Page 82
14
Additional information
Chapter 14:
Additional information
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
Power
SymptomRemedy
The power does not turn on.• Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.
The receiver suddenly switches
off or the Phase Control indicator
blinks.
During loud playback the power
suddenly switches off.
The unit does not respond when
the buttons are pressed.
AMP ERR blinks in the display,
then the power automatically
switches off. The MCACC blinks
and the power does not turn on.
FAN STOP blinks in the display,
then the power automatically
switches off.
OVERHEAT blinks in the display
then the power automatically
switches off.
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
• Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If
so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized
independent service company.
• Turn down the volume.
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 42.
• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down the SETUP button on the front panel, press STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use / to select D.SAFETY, and then use /
to select D.SAFETY 1 or D.SAFETY 2 (select D.SAFETY OFF to deactivate this feature). If the power switches
off even with D.SAFETY 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With D.SAFETY 1 or D.SAFETY 2 on, some
features may be unavailable.
• Try switching the receiver off then back on again.
• Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer
authorized independent service company for help.
• Something is obstructing the fan. Remove the obstruction and try switching the receiver back on. If the
fan is still not working, or you can’t remove the object, unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer
authorized independent service company.
• The fan is malfunctioning. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent
service company.
• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on.
82
En
Page 83
Additional information
No sound
SymptomRemedy
No sound is output when an input
source is selected.
No sound output from the front
speakers.
No sound from the surround or
center speakers.
No sound from surround back
speakers.
No sound from subwoofer.• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.
No sound from one speaker.• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
Sound is produced from analog
components, but not from digital
ones (DVD, LD, CD-ROM etc.).
No sound is output or a noise is
output when Dolby Digital/DTS
software is played back.
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).
• Make sure the correct input source is selected.
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SELECT). Note that when PCM is selected,
you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on page 12).
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
• Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected; select
one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 51).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
• Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• Make sure surround back processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on
page 31).
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with surround
back processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back speakers. In this case,
set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 31).
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back processing is set to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19). If only one surround back
speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of your other
speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to
Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options on
page 70).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 51).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 51).
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 50).
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening mode, you
may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to
(see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input source.
• Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
14
No sound when using the System
Setup or Status menu.
• If the HDMI input source is selected, sound is muted until exiting either menu.
• If sound is muted in the sub zone (ZONE 2), it will be restored after exiting the System Setup menu.
83
En
Page 84
14
Additional information
Other audio problems
SymptomRemedy
Broadcast stations cannot be
selected automatically, or there is
considerable noise in radio
broadcasts.
A multichannel DVD source
appears to be downmixed to 2
channels during playback.
Noise is output when scanning a
DTS CD.
When playing a DTS format LD
there is audible noise on the
soundtrack.
Can’t record audio.• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an analog
Recorded audio is different from
the current source, or inaudible.
Subwoofer output is very low.• To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see Speaker
Everything seems to be set up
correctly, but the playback sound
is odd.
The PHASE CONTROL feature
doesn’t seem to have an audible
effect.
Noise or hum can be heard even
when there is no sound being
input.
There seems to be a time lag
between the speakers and the
output of the subwoofer.
Can’t use the SR+ features.• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to OFF (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 65).
The maximum volume available
(shown in the front panel display)
is lower than the +12dB
maximum.
No sound is output from the CDR/TAPE OUT, DVR/VCR1 OUT or
DVR/VCR2 OUT jack.
Can’t select ZONE 2.• Make sure that ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu is set to ZONE 2 (see ZONE
For FM broadcasts
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 22).
For AM broadcasts
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 22).
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor, etc.
Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
on page 56).
• This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital information,
making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.
• Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
source.
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting analog audio sources on page 18).
• The RECOUT source is set to an input source other than the source you’re listening to. Select RECOUT
SOURCE to record the current input source (see Playing a different source when recording on page 72).
Setting on page 50).
• The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the receiver are
matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
• If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to
the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on
the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on page 51).
• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not
causing interference.
• See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 8 to set up
your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).
• This is not a malfunction. If the levels in Channel Level on page 51 have been adjusted, the maximum
volume will change accordingly.
• Make sure that ZONE 2 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu is set to RECSEL (see ZONE
Audio Setup on page 68).
Audio Setup on page 68).
84
En
Page 85
Additional information
Video
SymptomRemedy
No image is output when an input
is selected.
Can’t record video.• Check that the source is not copy-protected.
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted
picture.
Settings
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 16).
• For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is
switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 71), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the
same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video, HDMI or
S-video cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
• Check the video output settings of the source component.
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If adjusting
this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 71) and/or the resolution settings on
your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options
on page 71) OFF.
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video cable is
used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video
quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on
the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display
device using the same type of connection (component, S-video or composite), then start playback again.
14
SymptomRemedy
The Auto MCACC Setup
continually shows an error.
After using the Auto MCACC
Setup, the speaker size setting is
incorrect.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker
Distance setting (page 44)
properly.
The display shows KEY LOCK ON when you try to make
settings.
Most recent settings have been
erased.
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see also
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you
will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 50).
• There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off
all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases.
Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 50, and use the ALL (Keep SP SYSTEM)
option for the Custom Menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 39 if this is a recurring problem.
• Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are
matched up properly).
• With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button to
disable the key lock.
• The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
85
En
Page 86
14
Additional information
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
SymptomRemedy
The EQ response displayed in the
graphical output following
calibration does not appear
entirely flat.
EQ adjustments made using the
Manual MCACC setup on
page 42 do not appear to change
the graphical output.
Lower frequency response
curves do not seem to have been
calibrated for SMALL speakers.
Graphical output data seems to
have disappeared.
Display
SymptomRemedy
The display is dark or off.• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
After making an adjustment the
display goes off.
You can’t get DIGITAL to display
when using the SIGNAL SELECT
button.
The Dolby/DTS indicator doesn’t
light when playing Dolby/DTS
software.
When playing a DVD-Audio disc,
the DVD player display shows
96 kHz. However, the receiver’s
display does not.
During playback of a DTS 96/24
source, the display doesn’t show
96 kHz.
When playing Dolby Digital or
DTS sources, the receiver’s
format indicators do not light.
When playing certain discs, none
of the receiver’s format
indicators light.
When playing a disc with the
listening mode set to Auto
Surround, the 2 PL II or Neo:6
indicator lights on the receiver.
During playback of a Surround
EX or DTS-ES sour ce on the SBch AUTO setting, the EX and ES
indicators don’t light, or the
signal is not properly processed.
During playback of DVD-Audio,
the display shows PCM.
• There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJUST in the Auto
MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.
• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in
the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to
overall system calibration.
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that
have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is
output for display.
• If the power is switched off, the measurement data for graphical output to a PC is cleared.
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 66).
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input source.
• These indicators do dot light if playback is paused.
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.
• This is not a malfunction. 96 kHz audio from DVD-Audio discs is only output from the analog outputs of
the DVD player. This receiver cannot show the playback sample rate when using the analog inputs.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
• Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.
• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what audio
tracks are recorded on the disc.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a
malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.
• The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1 compatible.
Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 31) then switch to the THX Surround
EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).
• This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction.
86
En
Page 87
Additional information
Remote control
SymptomRemedy
Cannot be remote controlled.• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 6).
Other components can’t be
operated with the system remote.
The SR cable is connected, but
the connected components can’t
be operated with the remote.
HDMI
SymptomRemedy
The HDMI indicator blinks
continuously.
No picture or sound.• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-
No picture.• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 71).
No sound, or sound suddenly
ceases.
Noisy or distorted picture.• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video
HDCP ERROR shows in the
display.
• Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 24).
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 81).
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.
• Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the right jack (see Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 61).
• Make sure that there is an analog or HDMI connection between the units. This is necessary for the SR
feature to work.
• Check that the other component is made by Pioneer. The SR feature only works with Pioneer equipment.
• Check all the points below.
compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-video or composite video jacks.
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even
if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-video or composite video jacks
between source and receiver.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please
consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
• If video images do not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or
other setting for your component.
• If ‘NOT SUPPORT’ appears in the receiver’s display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or other
setting for your component.
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio output.
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to THROUGH, you
cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog audio connection.
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (compliant with Version 1.3a, Category 2) to connect
this receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature.
• Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.
quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on
the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display
device using the same type of connection (component, S-video or composite), then start playback again.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please
consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible with
HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-video or composite).
Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as
there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
14
87
En
Page 88
14
Additional information
USB interface (VSX-LX60 only)
SymptomRemedy
USB mass storage device is not
recognized by the receiver.
USB ERR3 shows in the display
when connecting a USB device.
Can’t play audio files.• The WMA or MPEG-4 AAC files were recorded using DRM (digital rights management), or the bit rate/
iPod messages
SymptomCauseAction
Error I1There is a problem with the signal path from the
Error I2The software version being used with the iPod
No Music TrackThere are no playable songs currently stored in
Loading ErrorThere is no responce from the iPod.Update the software being used with the iPod (please use the
• Try switching the receiver off, then on again.
• Make sure you have completely inserted the USB connector to this receiver.
• Check that the memory format is FAT16 or FAT32 (FAT12, NTFS and HFS are not supported).
• USB devices with an internal USB hub are not supported.
• If this message continues to appear after going through all the checks in Important on page 35 of USB playback, take the unit to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.
sampling rate is not compatible (see Compressed audio compatibility on page 35). This is not a
malfunction.
iPod to the receiver.
needs to be updated.
the iPod.
Switch off the receiver and reconnect the iPod to the receiver.
If this doesn’t seem to work, try resetting your iPod.
Update the software being used with the iPod (please use the
latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 200410-20).
Input some music files compatible with iPod playback.
latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 200410-20).
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
88
En
Page 89
Additional information
Surround sound formats
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial
broadcasts, and video cassettes.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system
widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital
broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six discrete audio
channels, comprising five full range channels and a special
LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep,
rumbling sound effects; hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby
Digital.
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates
and channels. Another feature, called Dialog Normalization,
attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in
a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm)
in order to achieve uniform playback level.
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended) is an
extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround
back channel is matrixed into the surround left/right
channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as
well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro
Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using the
innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system extracts
surround sound from sources as follows:
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono surround)
from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo
surround) from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound (stereo
surround and surround back) from two channel or
5.1(and 6.1) channel sources
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is
generated by bass management in the receiver.
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced
surround listening with greater sound detail.
14
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio technology
for all high-definition programming and media. It combines
the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the
power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential
expected in the upcoming high-definition era. Built on Dolby
Digital, the multi-channel audio standard for DVD and HD
broadcasts worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for
the next-generation A/V receivers but remains fully
compatible with all current A/V receivers.
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of
up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a
single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate
potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate
performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on
Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for
playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital
Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended
by directors and producers.
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete channel
output, interactive mixing and streaming capability in
advanced systems. Supported by High-Definition Media
Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is
possible for high-definition audio and video.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding
technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the
upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that
is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true
high-definition entertainment experience on high-definition
optical discs in the next generation. When coupled with
high-definition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented
home theater experience with stunning sound and highdefinition picture.
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 fullrange channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz audio. It
also features extensive metadata including dialogue
normalization and dynamic range control. Supported by
High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable
digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and
video.
HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their
maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas
Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than
eight audio channels.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
“Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
89
En
Page 90
14
Additional information
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system
from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games. It can
deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full
range channels, including an LFE channel. Higher sound
quality is achieved through the use of a low compression
rate, and high rates of transmittance during playback.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder
that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate
(discrete) surround back channel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a
surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/right
channels. Both sources are also compatible with a
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from
any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1
channel sources. It uses both the channel information
already encoded into the source, as well as its own
processing to determine channel localization (with two
channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by
bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and
Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two channel
sources.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using
a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward
compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD
players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5.1
channel decoder.
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-EXPRESSis a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer rates.
This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and
secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting the potential
applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio
contents.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master
audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners
without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD
Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates, facilitating
data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps in the
Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD format, which
by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These high data
transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit
7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating the quality
of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an
irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully
as intended by the creator of music or movies.
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS-HD
Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback with
sampling rates up to 24-bit/96 kHz. Using the unique WMA
compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver
multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed
internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio
degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows
Media Player 9 Series (or above) and other third-party media
players on a personal computer, or with an AV amplifier with
on-board WMA9 Pro decoding.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
About THX
The THX technologies are explained below. See
www.thx.com for more detailed information.
•THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by
THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your
home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called
dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres
with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then
transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX
engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate
the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,
when the THX indicator is on, the following THX features are
automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX
Surround EX) (see page 91).
90
En
Page 91
Additional information
14
•Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because
film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in
a small home environment.
•Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all
around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to
the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely
match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front
speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and
surround speakers.
•Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create
an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre
there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround
speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest
speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This
expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—
the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.
•THX Select2
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 certified, it
must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous
series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home
Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for
many years to come. THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of
the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance
and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital
and analog domain.
•THX Surround EX
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development
of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film
soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been
added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the
currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,
surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the
listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound
localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be
found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX
logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this
new technology in the home.
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during
the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the
Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may
not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the
tastes of the individual listener.
•Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together
facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the
largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the
Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up
screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the
speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field.
ASA is used in three new modes; THX Select2 Cinema, THX
MusicMode and THX Games Mode.
•THX Select2 Cinema mode
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all eight speakers
giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode,
ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back
surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and
directional surround sounds.
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2
Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.
•THX MusicMode
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital
and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
•THX Games Mode
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX
Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing
is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game
sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately
places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360
degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may be
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
About Neural Surround
VSX-LX70 only
Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround
technology and has been adopted by FM Radio and Neural Music
Direct for broadcasts of surround recordings and live events.
Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain
processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with
superior localization of surround elements. System playback is
scalable from stereo up to state-of-the-art multichannel surround.
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation,
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some
jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
91
En
Page 92
14
Additional information
Listening modes with different input signal formats
The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats, depending on the surround back
channel processing and decoding method you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
SBch ProcessingInput signal formatStandardTHXAuto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON/AUTO
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel decoding)
SBch
Processing
d
OFF
(Maximum 5.1
channel playback)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
Dolby Digital Surround2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS SurroundAs aboveAs aboveNeo:6 CINEMA
SACDAs above
Other stereo sources2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
WMA9 Pro
(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Stereo playbackTHX CINEMAAs above
As above
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neural THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Stereo playbackTHX CINEMAAs above
As above
a
a
a
c
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
THX GAMES MODE
–
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX GAMES MODE
–
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
THX GAMES MODE
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
–
a
b
a
b
a
b
Stereo playback
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
Stereo playback
Stereo playback
Stereo playback
As above
As above
92
En
Page 93
Additional information
SBch ProcessingInput signal formatStandardTHXAuto Surround
SBch
Processing
d
OFF
(Maximum 5.1
channel playback)
Dolby Digital Surround2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
DTS SurroundAs aboveAs aboveNeo:6 CINEMA
SACDAs above
Other stereo sources2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
a.2 Pro Logic has a maximum of 5.1 channel playback.
b.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
c.VSX-LX70 only – Available only with the FM or HOME MEDIA GALLERY input.
d.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neural THX
a
c
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
–
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
Multichannel signal formats
SBch ProcessingInput signal formatStandardTHXAuto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
(7.1 channel
decoding used for
all sources)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro (44.1 kHz/48 kHz)
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
Straight decodingTHX CINEMAStraight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
a
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
Straight decoding
–
Straight decodingTHX CINEMA
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
a
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
THX Select2 CINEMA
THX MUSICMODE
THX GAMES MODE
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
Stereo playback
Stereo playback
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIE
a
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIE
a
14
93
En
Page 94
14
Additional information
SBch ProcessingInput signal formatStandardTHXAuto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
(7.1 channel
decoding used for
all sources)
SBch
Processing
AUTO
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel
decoding)
sources/6.1 channel flagged)
SBch
Processing
c
OFF
(Maximum 5.1
channel
playback)
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
b.ES processing is not carried out for certain DTS-ES signals input from HDMI.
c.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see
Using Stream Direct on page 30) you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s)Input signal formatDIRECTPURE DIRECT
Connected
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)
Not connected
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)
a.SACD DIRECT (VSX-LX70) or Straight decoding (VSX-LX60)
Dolby Digital Surround2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
DTS SurroundNeo:6 CINEMANeo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sourcesStereo playbackStereo playback
Analog sourcesAs aboveANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sourcesAs abovePCM DIRECT (stereo)
DVD-A sourcesAs abovePCM DIRECT (stereo)
SACD sourcesAs above
Dolby Digital Surround2 Pro Logic II MOVIE2 Pro Logic II MOVIE
DTS SurroundNeo:6 CINEMANeo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sourcesStereo playbackStereo playback
Analog sourcesAs aboveANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sourcesAs abovePCM DIRECT (stereo)
DVD-A sourcesAs abovePCM DIRECT (stereo)
SACD sources
As above
SACD DIRECT (stereo)
SACD DIRECT (stereo)
a
a
14
Multichannel signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s)Input signal format
Connected
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)
Not connected
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
b.SACD DIRECT (VSX-LX70) or Straight decoding (VSX-LX60)
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)Dolby Digital EX
These operating instructions
Operating instructions for HOME MEDIA GALLERY
(VSX-LX70 only)
Note
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible
modifications without notice, due to improvements.
96
En
Page 97
Additional information
Cleaning the unit
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and
dirt.
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or
cleansers.
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will
corrode the surface.
Our philosophy
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater
listening experience as close as possible to the vision of
the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they
created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing
on three important steps:
1Achieving the highest possible sound quality
2Allowing for customized acoustic calibration
according to any listening area
3Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of worldclass studio engineers
Features
•Easy setup using Advanced MCACC
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This
innovative technology measures the reverb
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to
customize your system calibration with the help of a
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or
using a computer. With the additional benefits of
numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave
control and microphone measurements from a series of
reference points, your home theater experience can be
truly customized for optimal surround sound.
•HOME MEDIA GALLERY
This receiver can play back contents stored on your
computer when your computer is connected to the LAN
terminal of this receiver. Also, you can listen to the
Internet radio stations.
•Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD
Master Audio
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound
right into your home with up to six channels of surround
sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)
channel for deep, realistic sound effects.
1
(VSX-LX70 only)
14
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders
not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby
Surround sources, but will also generate convincing
surround sound for any stereo source.
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you
can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and
DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,
which are designed for the next-generation highdefinition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD,
support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer
rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is
available only when signals are delivered to this receiver
as primary audio).
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners
without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.
•Phase Control
The Phase Control feature corrects the phase distortion
as well as group delay for LFE (Low-Frequency Effects)
audio signals during multichannel playback.
•Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature analyzes the
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers
connected and corrects the phase distortion to the
flattened frequency-phase characteristics. This
correction minimizes the group delay of the middle- and
low-frequency ranges against the high-frequency range
and improves the frequency-phase characteristics
across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequencyphase characteristics between channels ensure better
surround sound integration.
•HDMI and digital video conversion
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video
format (HDMI Version 1.3), providing you with highdefinition digital video/audio via a single cable.
High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby
TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also
compatible with the DeepColor feature. You can operate
this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer
component that supports the HDMI Control function by
connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI.
Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver
makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and
analog video signals being input are converted and
output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.
97
En
Page 98
14
Additional information
•DCDi
Faroudja’s DCDi Processing is selectable and ensures
that images are smooth and natural, without staircasing
or jaggies.
•iPod Ready
With the new iPod terminal, you’ll be up and running in
no time, now that this receiver’s enhanced compatibility
makes on-screen control of your iPod an added
possibility.
1
With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated
AIR Studios Monitor Reference:
98
En
Page 99
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404